Eclogae on Exodus through Judges
The whole work on one page. Select a passage number to open that passage with its notes, Scripture references, and citation.
Chapter 281
281PG 12:281a–281d
τόʼ ι Ἐσκλήρυνε Κύριος ὁ θεὸς τὴν καρδίαν Φαραὼ, › πότερον ἀληθῶς πιστεύουσι λέγεσθαι ταῦτα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, διά Μωῡσέως ἐνθουσιῶντος, ἢ ψευδῶς · εί μὲν γὰρ ψευδῶς, οὕτε δίκαιος ἔτι κατʼ αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς, οὔτε ἀληθὴς, καὶ ὅσον ἐπὶ τούτοις οὐδέ Θεός· εί δʼ ἀληθῶς, κατανοείτωσαν εί μὴ ὡς αὐτεξούσιον αἱτιᾶται λέγωνʼ ι Ei δὲ μὴ βούλει ἐξαποστεῖλαι αὐτόν· ι καὶ ἀλλαχοῦ · ι Ἕως τίνος ού βούλει ἐντραπῆναί με; ι Τὸ γὰρ, ι Ἕωςτίνος ού βούλει ἐντραπῆναί με; ι δυσωπητικῶς λέγεται πρὸς τὸν Φαραὼ οὐκ ἐντρεπόμενον,ὀὺ παρά τὸ μὴ δύνασθαι, ἀλλά παρά τὸ μὴ βούλεσθαι. Καὶ τὸ λεγόμενον δὲ παρὰ Μωῦσέως πρὸς τὸνʼΦαραὼ, ι Ἵνα γνῷς ὅτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὴ γῆ, καὶ σὺ, καὶ οἱ θεράποντές σου, ἐπίσταμαι ὅτι οὐδέποτε πεφόβησθε τὸν Κύριον, ι δηλοῖ ὅτι φοβηθήσονται ο ὅπερ ἁρμόζει πρὸς τοὺς ἐτεροδόξους, περί τε ἁγαθότητος Θεοῦ, καὶ περὶτοῦ μὴ εἷναι ἀπολλυμένην φυσιν. ι Kal δώσω χάριν τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ ἐνώπιον τῶν Αίγυπτίων. Ὅταν δὲ ἀποτρέχοιτε, οὐκ ἀπελεύσεσθε κενοί. ι Αὕτη ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῷ Ἀβραάμ προεδέδοτο ι Μετὰ ταῦτα, λέγοντος τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐξελεύσονται ὦδε μετά ἀποσκευῆς. ι ‹ Kal. κατίσχυσεν ἡ καρδία Φαραὼ, καὶ οὐκ εἰσήκουσεν αὐτῶν, καθάπερ ἐνετείλατο αὐτοῖς Κύριος. Εῖπε δὲ Κύριος πρὸς Μωῦσῆν· Βεβάρυται ἡ καρδία Φαραὼ, τοῦ μὴ ἐξαποστεῖλαι τὸν λαόν. ι Τὸ, ι Βεβάρυται ἠ καρδία Φαραὼ, ι λεγόμενον ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, μετά τὴν μεταβαλοῦσαν εἰς δράκοντα ῥάβδον τοῦ Ἀαρὼν, καὶ καταπιοῦσαν τὰς τῶν Μάγων ῥάβδους, ἄξιον ἰδεῖν, εξ ἕτερόν ἐστι τοῦ, ι ἐσκληρύνθαι τὴν καρδίαν Φαραώ, ι λεγομένου πολλάκις,καʼίτοῦ,‹ κατισχυκέναι. ι Kal. γὰρ καὶ τοῦτο οὕτως εἴρηται, ι Kal. κατίσχυσεν ή καρδία Φαραὼ, καὶ οὐκ εἰσήκουσεν αὐτῶν καθὼς ἐλάλησε Κύριος. ι Δοκεῖ δέ μοι ἡ μὲν ἐνδιδοῦσα καρδία πρδς τὰ θεῖα, ἁπαλύνεσθαι καὶ μὴ ἰσχύειν ἀνθίστασθαι τῇ θειότητι, καὶ μὴ βαρύνεσθαι, μηδὲ ἕλκε
toʼ i Esklēryne Kyrios ho theos tēn kardian Pharaō, › poteron alēthōs pisteuousi legesthai tauta hypo tou Theou, dia Mōyseōs enthousiōntos, ē pseudōs ; ei men gar pseudōs, houte dikaios eti katʼ autous ho Theos, oute alēthēs, kai hoson epi toutois oude Theos; ei dʼ alēthōs, katanoeitōsan ei mē hōs autexousion haitiatai legōnʼ i Ei de mē boulei exaposteilai auton; i kai allachou ; i Heōs tinos ou boulei entrapēnai me? i To gar, i Heōstinos ou boulei entrapēnai me? i dysōpētikōs legetai pros ton Pharaō ouk entrepomenon,ou para to mē dynasthai, alla para to mē boulesthai. Kai to legomenon de para Mōyseōs pros tonʼPharaō, i Hina gnǭs hoti tou Kyriou ē gē, kai sy, kai hoi therapontes sou, epistamai hoti oudepote pephobēsthe ton Kyrion, i dēloi hoti phobēthēsontai o hoper harmozei pros tous eterodoxous, peri te hagathotētos Theou, kai peritou mē heinai apollymenēn physin. i Kal dōsō charin tǭ laǭ toutǭ enōpion tōn Aigyptiōn. Hotan de apotrechoite, ouk apeleusesthe kenoi. i Hautē hē epangelia tǭ Abraam proededoto i Meta tauta, legontos tou Theou, exeleusontai ōde meta aposkeuēs. i ‹ Kal. katischysen hē kardia Pharaō, kai ouk eisēkousen autōn, kathaper eneteilato autois Kyrios. Eipe de Kyrios pros Mōysēn; Bebarytai hē kardia Pharaō, tou mē exaposteilai ton laon. i To, i Bebarytai ē kardia Pharaō, i legomenon hypo tou Kyriou, meta tēn metabalousan eis drakonta rhabdon tou Aarōn, kai katapiousan tas tōn Magōn rhabdous, axion idein, ex heteron esti tou, i esklērynthai tēn kardian Pharaō, i legomenou pollakis,kaʼitou,‹ katischykenai. i Kal. gar kai touto houtōs eirētai, i Kal. katischysen ē kardia Pharaō, kai ouk eisēkousen autōn kathōs elalēse Kyrios. i Dokei de moi hē men endidousa kardia prds ta theia, hapalynesthai kai mē ischyein anthistasthai tę̄ theiotēti, kai mē barynesthai, mēde helke
the words “The Lord God hardened Pharaoh's heart,” let them say whether they believe that these words are spoken truly by God through Moses when he was inspired, or falsely. If falsely, then on their view God is no longer just, nor true, and as far as these words go not even God; but if truly, let them consider whether he does not blame Pharaoh as one having free will, when he says, “But if you will not send him away,” and elsewhere, “How long will you not be willing to respect me?” For “How long will you not be willing to respect me?” is said reproachfully to Pharaoh, who did not show respect, not because he could not but because he would not. And what Moses says to Pharaoh, “That you may know that the earth is the Lord's; and you and your servants, I know that you have never feared the Lord,” shows that they will fear; which fits the argument against the heterodox, both about God's goodness and about there being no perishing nature. [Exod 3:21–22] “And I will give this people favour before the Egyptians; and when you depart, you shall not go away empty.” This promise had been given beforehand to Abraham, when God said, “After these things they shall come out here with baggage.” [Exod 7:13–14] “And Pharaoh's heart was strengthened, and he did not listen to them, as the Lord had commanded them. And the Lord said to Moses: Pharaoh's heart is made heavy, so that he does not send away the people.” “Pharaoh's heart is made heavy,” said by the Lord after Aaron's rod had turned into a serpent and swallowed the magicians' rods: it is worth seeing whether this differs from “Pharaoh's heart was hardened,” which is said often, and from “was strengthened.” For this too is said thus: “And Pharaoh's heart was strengthened, and he did not listen to them, as the Lord had said.” It seems to me that the heart that yields to divine things is softened and has no strength to resist the divinity, and is not made heavy nor dragged
Chapter 283
283PG 12:284a–284d
σθαι κάτω εἰς γῆν καὶ ὓλην · ἡ δὲ ἀντιτείνουσα καὶ ὲναντιουμένη τῷ θείῳ βουλήματι, σκληρύνεσθαι καὶ ἀντιτυπεῖν δίκην λίθου, καὶ ἀποκρούεσθαι τὸν λόγον, καὶ κατʼ ἀπόνοιαν ἀνθίστασθαι μετά τινος ψευδωνύμου ἰσχύος. ’Δνάγκη δὲ τὴν τοιαύτην καρδίαν καθελκομένην ὑπὸ τῆς κακίας οὔσης κατωφεροίς, βαρύνεσθαι. Oti μὴν κατά τὴν αὑτὴν διάνοιαν ταῦτα τῇ καρδίᾳ συμβαίνει, εἰ καὶ μιᾷ καὶ τῇ αὑτῇ συμβέβηκε φαύλῃ οὔσῃ τὸ κατισχύειν καὶ τὸ βαρύνεσθαι. μὲν γὰρ, ὡς εἴρηταί που, λιθίνη γίνεται ἡ καρδία καὶ σκληρύνεται · ἠ δὲ οὑ παραχωρεῖ ὡς κρείττονιτῇ θείᾳ φύσει· ἀλλὰ θεομαχεῖν ἱσταμένη κατʼ αὐτῆς καὶ ἰσχύειν λέγεται. ι Eine δὲ αύτῷ Μωὺσῆς, Ὠς ἂν ἐξέλθω τὴν πόλιν, ὲκπετάσω τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς Κύριον, καὶ αἰ φωαναὶ παύσονται, καὶ ἡ χάλαζα, καὶ 6 ὑετὸς οὐκέτι έσται. ι ’0 γὰρ πάντων δημιουργὸς πρὸς τὴν κέλευσιν τὴν φύσιν εἴκουσαν ἔχει. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Σημειωτέον ὅτι οὑ πάντα τῇ ῥάβδῳ τερατουργεί Μωῦσῆς, ἀλλὰ καὶ χερσί καὶ λόγῳ, ἵνα μὴ τὴν ῥάβδον μαγικαῖς ἀπάταις τελεῖσθαι υἱ πολλοὶ νομίσωσι. ι Λαβέτωσαν ἕκαστος πρόβατον κατʼ οἴκους πατριῶν ο ι καὶ τά ἑξῆς. Ἀπὸ τῆς δεκάτης φησί λαμβάνειν πρόβατον καὶ τρέφειν ἕως ιδ” καὶ ἐπονομάη σαι λέγοντας, Τοῦτο τὸ πρόβατον θύεται ὑπὲρ τοῦδε καὶ τοῦδε· οὑχ ὑπερβαινόντων αὑτῶν ιʼ ὀνομάτων· καὶ τῇ ιδʼ θύεται ἀνάμεσον τῶν ἐσπερινῶν, ἀρχομένης τῆς ιεʼ· ὡς γίνεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς λήψεως μέχρι τῆς θύσεως ἡμέρας εʼ, ὅτε πλῆρές ἐστι τῆς σελήνης τὸ φῶς. ι Πρόβατον τέλειον, ἄρσεν, ἐνιαύσιον ἔσται ὑμῖν. ι Ἐνιαύσιον πρόβατον 6 Χριστός ἐστι. Τὸ γάρ ὲν μην δενί ὑστερεῖσθαι μηδὲ ἐλλιπές τι ἔχειν διὰ τοῦ ὲνιαυ· τοῦ δηλοῦται. ι Καὶ σφάξουσιν αὐτὸ πᾶν τὺ πλῆθος συναγωγῆς υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ πρὸς ἑσπέραν. ι Πρὸς ἑσπέραν δὲ κει λευόμεθα σφάξαι τὸ πρόβατον, ἐπειδὴ καὶ ἐσχάτῃ ὥρᾳ τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἡ μῶν πρόβατον εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἦλθεν 6 Σωτήρ. ι Καὶ λήψονται ἀπὺ τοῦ αἵματος, καὶ θήσουσιν ἐπὶ τῶν δύο σταθμῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν φλιάν, ὲν τοῖς οἴκοις ο ι καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. Θύομεν δὲ, καὶ χρίομεν τοὺς οἴκους ἡμῶν τῷ αἵματι λέγω δὲ τὸ σῶμα, εἰπερ χρίσις πίστις ἐστὶν ἡ εἰς αὑτὸν, διʼ ἦς πιστεύω τὴν τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ δύναμιν καταργουμένην. Μετὰ δὲ τὸ χρισθῆναι ἡμᾶς, τουτέστι πιστεῦσαι εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν, τότε καί ἐπὶ τὴν βρῶσιν ἔρχεσθαι κελευόμεθαο μήτε δὲ ὠμὰ, μήτε ὲψημένα ὲν ὕδατι, ἀλλʼ ὀπτὰ πυρί. ι Πᾶς ὃς ἂν φάγῃ ζύμην, ὲξολοθρευθήσεται ή ψυχὴ ἐκείνη ὲξ Ἰσραήλ. r Ἐξολοθρευθήσεται ἄνθρωπος ἕνεκεν ζύμης · καὶ ὁ τῶν ὅλων Θεὸς 6 χρηματίζων τοὺς νόμους, ὡς ὀλοθρεύει μοιχὸν, ὡς ὁλοθρεύει πόρνον, ὠς όλοθρεύει παιδοφθόρον, οὑτως όλοθρεύει τὸν έχοντα ζύμην ὲν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὑτοῦ ἐν τῇ τῶν ἀζύμων ἡμέρᾳ. Τοῦτο κατά Θεόν ἐστι ; τοῦτο κατά νόμον τδν ούράνίόν tactv: Ἀλλʼ εἴποιμι ἀν ὅτι ἐὰν ἔχῃς ζύμην
sthai katō eis gēn kai hylēn ; hē de antiteinousa kai enantioumenē tǭ theiǭ boulēmati, sklērynesthai kai antitypein dikēn lithou, kai apokrouesthai ton logon, kai katʼ aponoian anthistasthai meta tinos pseudōnymou ischyos. ’Dnankē de tēn toiautēn kardian kathelkomenēn hypo tēs kakias ousēs katōpherois, barynesthai. Oti mēn kata tēn hautēn dianoian tauta tę̄ kardią symbainei, ei kai mią kai tę̄ hautę̄ symbebēke phaulę̄ ousę̄ to katischyein kai to barynesthai. men gar, hōs eirētai pou, lithinē ginetai hē kardia kai sklērynetai ; ē de hou parachōrei hōs kreittonitę̄ theią physei; alla theomachein histamenē katʼ autēs kai ischyein legetai. i Eine de autǭ Mōysēs, Ōs an exelthō tēn polin, ekpetasō tas cheiras mou pros Kyrion, kai ai phōanai pausontai, kai hē chalaza, kai 6 hyetos ouketi estai. i ’0 gar pantōn dēmiourgos pros tēn keleusin tēn physin eikousan echei. Tou autou. Sēmeiōteon hoti hou panta tę̄ rhabdǭ teratourgei Mōysēs, alla kai chersi kai logǭ, hina mē tēn rhabdon magikais apatais teleisthai hui polloi nomisōsi. i Labetōsan hekastos probaton katʼ oikous patriōn o i kai ta hexēs. Apo tēs dekatēs phēsi lambanein probaton kai trephein heōs id” kai eponomaē sai legontas, Touto to probaton thyetai hyper toude kai toude; houch hyperbainontōn hautōn iʼ onomatōn; kai tę̄ idʼ thyetai anameson tōn esperinōn, archomenēs tēs ieʼ; hōs ginesthai apo tēs lēpseōs mechri tēs thyseōs hēmeras eʼ, hote plēres esti tēs selēnēs to phōs. i Probaton teleion, arsen, eniausion estai hymin. i Eniausion probaton 6 Christos esti. To gar en mēn deni hystereisthai mēde ellipes ti echein dia tou eniau; tou dēloutai. i Kai sphaxousin auto pan ty plēthos synagōgēs huiōn Israēl pros hesperan. i Pros hesperan de kei leuometha sphaxai to probaton, epeidē kai eschatę̄ hōrą to alēthinon hē mōn probaton eis ton kosmon ēlthen 6 Sōtēr. i Kai lēpsontai apy tou haimatos, kai thēsousin epi tōn dyo stathmōn, kai epi tēn phlian, en tois oikois o i kai ta hexēs. Thyomen de, kai chriomen tous oikous hēmōn tǭ haimati legō de to sōma, eiper chrisis pistis estin hē eis hauton, diʼ ēs pisteuō tēn tou olothreutou dynamin katargoumenēn. Meta de to christhēnai hēmas, toutesti pisteusai eis ton Christon, tote kai epi tēn brōsin erchesthai keleuomethao mēte de ōma, mēte epsēmena en hydati, allʼ opta pyri. i Pas hos an phagę̄ zymēn, exolothreuthēsetai ē psychē ekeinē ex Israēl. r Exolothreuthēsetai anthrōpos heneken zymēs ; kai ho tōn holōn Theos 6 chrēmatizōn tous nomous, hōs olothreuei moichon, hōs holothreuei pornon, ōs olothreuei paidophthoron, houtōs olothreuei ton echonta zymēn en tę̄ oikią hautou en tę̄ tōn azymōn hēmerą. Touto kata Theon esti ? touto kata nomon tdn ouranion tactv: Allʼ eipoimi an hoti ean echę̄s zymēn
down to earth and matter; while the heart that resists and opposes the divine will is hardened and resists like stone, and repels the word, and in desperation resists with a falsely named strength. And such a heart, dragged down by vice, which tends downward, must be made heavy. Yet these things do not happen to the heart in the same sense, even if being strengthened and being made heavy both happen to one and the same wicked heart. In one respect, as is said somewhere, the heart becomes stony and is hardened; in another it does not yield to the divine nature as the better, but standing to fight against God it is said also to be strong. [Exod 9:29] “And Moses said to him: When I go out of the city, I will spread out my hands to the Lord, and the voices will cease, and the hail and the rain will be no more.” For the creator of all has nature yielding to his command. [Of the same.] It should be noted that Moses works wonders not with the rod alone, but also with his hands and his word, lest the many should think that the rod accomplished them by magical deceits. [Exod 12:3] “Let each take a sheep by fathers' houses,” and so on. From the tenth day, it says, they are to take a sheep and keep it until the fourteenth, and to name it, saying, “This sheep is sacrificed for so-and-so and so-and-so,” the names not exceeding ten; and on the fourteenth it is sacrificed between the evenings, as the fifteenth begins; so that from the taking to the sacrificing there are five days, when the moon's light is full. [Exod 12:5] “A perfect sheep, male, a year old, it shall be for you.” Christ is the year-old sheep; for that he lacks in nothing and has no deficiency is shown through the year. [Exod 12:6] “And the whole multitude of the congregation of the sons of Israel shall slaughter it toward evening.” We are commanded to slaughter the sheep toward evening, since our true sheep, the Saviour, came into the world in the last hour. [Exod 12:7] “And they shall take some of the blood and put it on the two doorposts and on the lintel, in the houses,” and so on. We sacrifice, and we anoint our houses with the blood (I mean the body), if indeed the anointing is faith in him, through which I believe that the power of the destroyer is abolished. After we have been anointed, that is, have believed in Christ, then we are commanded to come also to the eating; neither raw, nor boiled in water, but roasted with fire. [Exod 12:15] “Whoever eats leaven, that soul shall be destroyed from Israel.” A man will be destroyed because of leaven! And the God of all, who issues the laws, as he destroys an adulterer, as he destroys a fornicator, as he destroys a corrupter of boys, so destroys the one who has leaven in his house on the day of unleavened bread. Is this worthy of God? Is this in keeping with the heavenly law? But I would say that if you have the leaven
Chapter 285
285PG 12:285a–285d
πονηρίας, καὶ μὴ ἐξολοθρεύσης πᾶσαν ζύμην κακίας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡγεμονικοῦ σου· αὕτη γάρ ἐστιν ἡ ἀληθινὴ οἰκία σου ' ὁ Θεὸς τῶν ὅλων νομοθετεῖ ἐξολοθρευθῆναί σε μὴ ἀποβαλόντα τὴν ζύμην τὴν παλαιὰν ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ. Χρὴ γάρ σε ἐλθόντα εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τῶν νέων, νέον γενόμενον μηδὲν ἔχειν ἀρχαῖον. ί Τὰ ἀρχαῖα παρῆλθε, ι καὶ τά ἑξῆς. Ὅρα πῶς ἔδει ἑορτάζειν ἐν μηνὶ τῶν νέων τὴν ἑορτὴν τῶν ἀζύμων. ι Καθίξετε τῆς φλιᾶς, καὶ ἐπʼ ἀμφοτέρων τῶν σταθμῶν, ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος ὃ ἐστι παρά τὴν θύραν. › φλιᾱς μὲν, ὡς ἀποδέδωκέ τις τῶν πρὸ ἡμῶν, τοῦ λογικοῦ· ἀμφοτέρων δὲ σταθμῶν, θυμικοῦ καὶ ἐπιθυμητικοῦ. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Ού γὰρ ἐντὸς γενόμενον τὸν ὁλοθρευτὴν διʼ ἐπινοίας ἐκβάλλομεν, ἀλλʼ ὅπως ἂν μηδέ τὴν ἀρχὴν παρεισδύῃ, φυλακὴν διὰ τοῦ νόμου ποιούμεθα. Φυλακὴ δέ ἐστι καί ἀσφάλεια, τὸ, τῷ αἵματι τοῦ ἀμνοῦ τήν τε φλιάν καὶ τοὺς σταθμοὺς τῆς εἰσόδου κατασημαίνεσθαι. ι Ἐγενηθη δὲ μεσούσης τῆς νυκτὸς, καὶ Κύριος ἐπάταξε πᾶν πρωτότοκον ἐν γῇ Αἰγύπτῳ. ι Διʼ ἀγγέλων γὰρ ὁ Θεὸς τὰς θανατηφόρους ταύτας ἐπάγει πληγὰς, ὡς καὶ ἐν ταῖς Βασιλείαις ἔγνωμεν πῶς ἐν μιᾷ νυκτὶ ό ἄγγελος ἀνεῖλε τῶν Ἀσσυρίων ρπε χιλιάδας. ι Οὗτος ὁ νόμος τοῦ Πάσχαο Πᾶς ἀλλογενὴς οὐκ ἔδεται ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ. Καὶ πάντα οἰκέτην τινὸς, καὶ ἀργυρώνητον περιτεμεῖς αὑτὸν, καὶ τότε φάγεται ἀπʼ αὐτοῦʼ ι καὶ τά ἑξῆς. ’Λκολούθως τοῖς παρα-τεθεῖσι τρίτος ἐστὶν οὗτος νόμος, ὃν εἷπε πάλιν ό Κύριος rupe. τοὺς δύο νόμους. Πρόσχες δὲ τῇ ἀκριβείᾳ τῆς Γραφῆς, ὅτι οὐκ εἶπε τοῦτον τὸν νόμον τὸν περὶ τοῦ Πάσχα. ὁ Κύριος ἐν τῇ ἀρχῇ. Εἰ γὰρ εἰρήκει ἔτι ὃντων ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ πρὶν ἀπᾷραι ἐκ τῆς Αἰγύπτου τὸν Ἰσραὴλ, τὸ, ‹ Πᾶς ἀλλογενὴς οὐκ ἔδεται ἀπʼ αὑτοῦ. Καὶ πάντα οἰκέτην τινος, καὶ ἀργυρώνητον περιτεμετς, καὶ τότε φάγεται ἀπʼ αὑτοῦ, ι οὐκ ἂν ἐξεληλύοησαν ὁ πολύμικτος πολὺς ὄχλος ό ἐξελθὼν ἐξ Αἰγύπτου. Ἐτήρησεν οὖν τὸν νόμον τοῦτον, ἵνα μετὰ τοῦ ἐξελθεῖν τοὺς βουλομένους δοθῇ ἄλλος νόμος. Καὶ μετʼ ὀλίγα. Ἐὰν ἀλληγορῶμεν ταῦτα. εἰς τὴν ψυχὴν ἡμῶν, ἐροῦμεν ὅτι οἰκογενεῖς μέν εἰσιν οἱ συμπεφυκότες ήμῖν καὶ γεωργηθέντες λόγοι, καὶ ἐπιστῆναι ἀπὸ συμφύτων ἐννοιῶν ἀρξάμενοι· ἀργυρώνητοι δὲ, ὅσοι ἐκ διδασκαλίας ἡμῖν ἐπιγίνονται ἔξωθεν ἀπὸ τῶν μαθημάτων. Πάντας 06v φησι περιτέμνειν καὶ καθαίρειν, καὶ τοὺς οἰκογενεῖς, καὶ τοὺς ἀργυρωνή· τους. Ἀλλογενῆ δὲ οὐδένα δεῖ προσλαμβάνειν, οἷον ἀλλότριον δόγμα προσιεμένουςο ἀλλογενῆ γάρ οὑ παραδέχεται, ὃς βούλεται βεβηλῶσαι τὴν ἑορτὴν τοῦ Κυρίου. Καὶ μετʼ ὀλίγα. Εἰγάρ ἐν Ἐκκλησία ἐσθίεις λόγους Θεοῦ, ἐσθίεις δὲ καὶ ἐν Ἰουδαίων συναγωγῇ, παραβαίνεις τὴν λέγουσαν ἐντολὴν, ι Ἐν οἰκίᾳ μιᾷ βρωθησεται. ι Εἰ δὲ μεταλαμβάνεις λόγων Θεοῦ, ἐν οἰκίᾳ μιᾷ τῇ Ἐκκλησία· εἶτα καταλιπὼν αὐτὴν, 67:0λαμβάνεις μεταλαμβάνειν Θεοῦ ἐν αἱρετικῇ συναγωγῇ,
ponērias, kai mē exolothreusēs pasan zymēn kakias apo tou hēgemonikou sou; hautē gar estin hē alēthinē oikia sou ' ho Theos tōn holōn nomothetei exolothreuthēnai se mē apobalonta tēn zymēn tēn palaian apo seautou. Chrē gar se elthonta eis ton kairon tōn neōn, neon genomenon mēden echein archaion. i Ta archaia parēlthe, i kai ta hexēs. Hora pōs edei heortazein en mēni tōn neōn tēn heortēn tōn azymōn. i Kathixete tēs phlias, kai epʼ amphoterōn tōn stathmōn, apo tou haimatos ho esti para tēn thyran. › phlias men, hōs apodedōke tis tōn pro hēmōn, tou logikou; amphoterōn de stathmōn, thymikou kai epithymētikou. Tou hautou. Ou gar entos genomenon ton holothreutēn diʼ epinoias ekballomen, allʼ hopōs an mēde tēn archēn pareisdyę̄, phylakēn dia tou nomou poioumetha. Phylakē de esti kai asphaleia, to, tǭ haimati tou amnou tēn te phlian kai tous stathmous tēs eisodou katasēmainesthai. i Egenēthē de mesousēs tēs nyktos, kai Kyrios epataxe pan prōtotokon en gę̄ Aigyptǭ. i Diʼ angelōn gar ho Theos tas thanatēphorous tautas epagei plēgas, hōs kai en tais Basileiais egnōmen pōs en mią nykti o angelos aneile tōn Assyriōn rpe chiliadas. i Houtos ho nomos tou Paschao Pas allogenēs ouk edetai apʼ autou. Kai panta oiketēn tinos, kai argyrōnēton peritemeis hauton, kai tote phagetai apʼ autouʼ i kai ta hexēs. ’Lkolouthōs tois para-tetheisi tritos estin houtos nomos, hon heipe palin o Kyrios rupe. tous dyo nomous. Prosches de tę̄ akribeią tēs Graphēs, hoti ouk eipe touton ton nomon ton peri tou Pascha. ho Kyrios en tę̄ archę̄. Ei gar eirēkei eti hontōn en Aigyptǭ prin apąrai ek tēs Aigyptou ton Israēl, to, ‹ Pas allogenēs ouk edetai apʼ hautou. Kai panta oiketēn tinos, kai argyrōnēton peritemets, kai tote phagetai apʼ hautou, i ouk an exelēlyoēsan ho polymiktos polys ochlos o exelthōn ex Aigyptou. Etērēsen oun ton nomon touton, hina meta tou exelthein tous boulomenous dothę̄ allos nomos. Kai metʼ oliga. Ean allēgorōmen tauta. eis tēn psychēn hēmōn, eroumen hoti oikogeneis men eisin hoi sympephykotes ēmin kai geōrgēthentes logoi, kai epistēnai apo symphytōn ennoiōn arxamenoi; argyrōnētoi de, hosoi ek didaskalias hēmin epiginontai exōthen apo tōn mathēmatōn. Pantas 06v phēsi peritemnein kai kathairein, kai tous oikogeneis, kai tous argyrōnē; tous. Allogenē de oudena dei proslambanein, hoion allotrion dogma prosiemenouso allogenē gar hou paradechetai, hos bouletai bebēlōsai tēn heortēn tou Kyriou. Kai metʼ oliga. Eigar en Ekklēsia esthieis logous Theou, esthieis de kai en Ioudaiōn synagōgę̄, parabaineis tēn legousan entolēn, i En oikią mią brōthēsetai. i Ei de metalambaneis logōn Theou, en oikią mią tę̄ Ekklēsia; eita katalipōn autēn, 67:0lambaneis metalambanein Theou en hairetikę̄ synagōgę̄,
of wickedness and do not destroy all the leaven of vice from your ruling faculty (for this is your true house), the God of all legislates that you be destroyed if you have not cast the old leaven out from yourself. For having come to the time of new things, you must, having become new, have nothing old: “The old things have passed away,” and so on. See how one ought to keep the feast of unleavened bread in the month of new things. [Exod 12:22] “You shall touch the lintel and both doorposts with the blood that is by the door.” The lintel, as one of those before us explained, is the rational part; the two doorposts, the spirited and the desiring. [Of the same.] For we do not cast out the destroyer by some contrivance once he has got inside; rather, we keep guard through the law so that he may not slip in at all. And the guard and safety is to mark the lintel and doorposts of the entrance with the blood of the lamb. [Exod 12:29] “And it came to pass at midnight, and the Lord struck every firstborn in the land of Egypt.” For God brings these death-bearing plagues through angels, as we know also from the Kingdoms how in one night the angel killed a hundred and eighty-five thousand of the Assyrians. [Exod 12:43–44] “This is the law of the Passover: No foreigner shall eat of it. And every servant of anyone, and one bought with money, you shall circumcise him, and then he shall eat of it,” and so on. Following what has been set out, this is a third law, which the Lord spoke again besides the two laws. Attend to the precision of Scripture: the Lord did not speak this law about the Passover at the beginning. For if he had said, while they were still in Egypt, before Israel set out from Egypt, “No foreigner shall eat of it; and every servant of anyone and one bought with money you shall circumcise, and then he shall eat of it,” the great mixed crowd that went out of Egypt would not have gone out. He kept this law back, then, so that after those who wished had gone out, another law might be given. And a little later. If we allegorize these things of our soul, we shall say that the house-born are the reasonings that have grown up with us and been cultivated, having begun to take their stand from innate notions; those bought with money are all that come to us from outside through teaching, from the sciences. He says, then, that all are to be circumcised and cleansed, both the house-born and the bought. But we must take in no foreigner, as those do who admit a foreign doctrine; for he does not accept a foreigner, who would profane the feast of the Lord. And a little later. For if you eat the words of God in the church and eat also in the synagogue of the Jews, you transgress the commandment that says, “It shall be eaten in one house.” And if you partake of the words of God in one house, the church, and then, leaving it, you undertake to partake of God in a heretical synagogue,
Chapter 287
287PG 12:288a–288d
λεγούσης τῆς ἐντολῆς, ι Ἐν οίκίᾳ μιᾷ primm)“. ται, › σὺ οὐκ ἐσθίεις ἐν οἰκίᾳ μιᾷ. Μίαν οὖν νοήσαι οίκίαν τὴν Ἐκκλησίαν· μηδαμοῦ οὖν ἐσθιε τοῦ προβάτου ἔξω γενόμενος τῆς Ἐκκλησίας. ι Καὶ οὐκ ἐξοίσετε ἐκ τῆς οίκίας τῶν κρεῶν ἔξω.» Ἐκκλησιαστικὸν λόγον οὐ δεῖ ἔξω τῆς Ἐκκλησίας πρεσβεύειν, ὡς ἔξω τῆς οἰκίας μὴ ἐκφέρειν τά κρέαο φημὶ δέ είς συναγωγὴν Ἰουδαίων ἢ αίρετικῶνο ὅμοιον γάρ ἐστι τῷ ῥίψαι τοὺς μαργαρίτας ἔμπροσθεν τῶν χοίρων., «Πᾶς ἀπερίτμητος οὐκ ἔδεται ἀπʼ αὑτοῦ. ι Πᾶν γέν-ν νημα ψυχῆς νοητὸν ὑπερβαίνον τά ὑλικά (ὑλικά δὲ τὰ θήλεα) περιτέμνειν καὶ καθαίρειν δεῖ, ἴνα οὕτως μεταλαμβάνῃ τις τῶν κρεῶν τοῦ Πάσχα· ὡς αὐτόχθων δὲ τῆς γῆς, καὶ 6 προσήλυτος γίνεται· οὑ γὰρ τὰ σπέρματα προτιμᾷ 6 Θεὸς τὰ εὐγενῆ, ἀλλά προαίρεσιν ἀποδέχεται. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. ’Λπερίτμητον τῇ σαρκὶ τὸν μὴ περιτεμνόμενον τά σαρκικὰ φησιν, ὥσπερ καὶ ἀπερίτμητον ὀφθαλμοῖς τὸν βλέποντα πρὸς ἃ μὴ δεῖ. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ὁρᾶτε μή τις ὑμῶν ἀπερίτμητός ἐστι τῇ καρδίαι. μή τις οὐ περιτέτμηται τὰς περιτομάς ἃς ό λόγος διδάσκει περιτέμνεσθαι. Ποίας δέ ταύταςς ἀπερίτμητοι τὰ ὦτα ὀνειδίζονταί τινες ὄντες· καὶ ὅσοι οὐ περιτέτμηνται τὴν ἀκοὴν, ἀκάθαρτοί είσιν. ’Δπερίτμητος χείλεσιν, 6 μὴ περιτεμνόμενος τοὺς λόγους τοὺς ἐναντίους καὶ ἀκαθάρτους. Οὕτως ἐστι καὶ ἀπερίτμητον τῇ σαρκὶ εἰπεῖν, τὸν μὴ περιτεμνόο μενον τά σαρκικά πράγματαʼ καὶ ἀπερίτμητον ὀφθαλμοῖς, τὸν βλέποντα ἃ μὴ δεῖ, καὶ μὴ καθαίροντα τὸ ὁρατικόν καὶ ἀπερίτμητον σαρκὶ, τὸν πράττοντα ἃ μὴ δεῖ. ι Ἐξάραντες δὲ οί υίοὶ Ἰσραὴλ ἐκ Σοκχὼθ, ἐστρατοπέδευσαν ἐν Ὀθὼμ παρά τὴν ἔρημον. ι Ἑν τοῖς Ἀριθμοίς κεῖται, «ἀπὸ Βουθὰ ἐπὶ στόμα ’ῐρώθ·ὂ ἐστιν ἀπέναντι Βεελσεπρὼν ἐχόμενα τοῦ Βορρἄ, ι παρεμβεβληκέναι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ. ι Καὶ έλαβε ἑξακόσια ἀρματα ἐκλεκτά, καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν ἵππον τῶν Δίγυπτίων,καὶ τριστάτας ἐπὶ πάντων.» Τοὺς πρὸς τρεῖς δυναμένους μάχεσθαι, ἦ τοὺς ἐν τῇ παρατάξει μετὰ τὸν πρωτοστάτην καὶτὸν δευτεροστάτην ἱσταμένους ἐν τῇ τρίτῃ τάξει. ΙἈλλοι δέ φασιν, ὠς εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν πολεμίων ἅρματα ἐποίουν μεγάλα, ὥστε καὶ τρεῖς χωρεῖν, ἵνα 6 μὲν εἷς ἡνιοχεῖ, οί δέ δύο πολεμοῦσιν· ἢ τοὺς ἐπὶ τριῶν ἵππων βεβηκότας. Oi γὰρ παλαιοὶ ὲν τοῖς πολέμοις ἐπὶ δύοῆ τριῶν ἵππων ἐπωχοῦντο ἐξιόντες ἁρματηλάται. Ἦ τριστάτην λέγει τὸν ἐν τῷ καθέζεσθαι τὸν βασιλέα, τρίτον ἱστάμενον, ἧτοι τρίτην ἔχοντα καθέδραν· οἶος ἦν 6 Δαυῖδ παρὰ Σαοὺλ, ὡς ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ τῶν Βασιλειῶν εὑρή σεις. ι Ἐκεῖ ἔθετο αὐτῷ 6 Θεὸς δικαιώματα καὶ κρίσεις. καὶ ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ἐπείρασε.» Ὅτε Θεὸς πειράζει, ἐπʼ ὠφελείᾳ πειράζει, οὐκ ἐπὶ τῷ κακοποιῆσαιʼ διὸ καὶ ἐλέχθη, ὅτι ι '0 Θεὸς ἀπείραστός ἐστι κακῶν, ι ὡς καὶ μετʼ ὀλίγα ἐπάγει 6 λόγοςʼ ι Ἐάν ἀκοῇ ἀκούσῃς Κυρίου τοῦ Θεοῦ σου, πᾶσαν νόσον, ἣν ἐπήγαγον τοῖς
legousēs tēs entolēs, i En oikią mią primm)“. tai, › sy ouk esthieis en oikią mią. Mian oun noēsai oikian tēn Ekklēsian; mēdamou oun esthie tou probatou exō genomenos tēs Ekklēsias. i Kai ouk exoisete ek tēs oikias tōn kreōn exō.» Ekklēsiastikon logon ou dei exō tēs Ekklēsias presbeuein, hōs exō tēs oikias mē ekpherein ta kreao phēmi de eis synagōgēn Ioudaiōn ē airetikōno homoion gar esti tǭ rhipsai tous margaritas emprosthen tōn choirōn., «Pas aperitmētos ouk edetai apʼ hautou. i Pan gen-n nēma psychēs noēton hyperbainon ta hylika (hylika de ta thēlea) peritemnein kai kathairein dei, ina houtōs metalambanę̄ tis tōn kreōn tou Pascha; hōs autochthōn de tēs gēs, kai 6 prosēlytos ginetai; hou gar ta spermata protimą 6 Theos ta eugenē, alla proairesin apodechetai. Tou hautou. ’Lperitmēton tę̄ sarki ton mē peritemnomenon ta sarkika phēsin, hōsper kai aperitmēton ophthalmois ton bleponta pros ha mē dei. Tou autou. Horate mē tis hymōn aperitmētos esti tę̄ kardiai. mē tis ou peritetmētai tas peritomas has o logos didaskei peritemnesthai. Poias de tautass aperitmētoi ta ōta oneidizontai tines ontes; kai hosoi ou peritetmēntai tēn akoēn, akathartoi eisin. ’Dperitmētos cheilesin, 6 mē peritemnomenos tous logous tous enantious kai akathartous. Houtōs esti kai aperitmēton tę̄ sarki eipein, ton mē peritemnoo menon ta sarkika pragmataʼ kai aperitmēton ophthalmois, ton bleponta ha mē dei, kai mē kathaironta to horatikon kai aperitmēton sarki, ton prattonta ha mē dei. i Exarantes de oi uioi Israēl ek Sokchōth, estratopedeusan en Othōm para tēn erēmon. i Hen tois Arithmois keitai, «apo Boutha epi stoma ’irōth;o estin apenanti Beelseprōn echomena tou Borra, i parembeblēkenai tous huious Israēl. i Kai elabe hexakosia armata eklekta, kai pasan tēn hippon tōn Digyptiōn,kai tristatas epi pantōn.» Tous pros treis dynamenous machesthai, ē tous en tę̄ parataxei meta ton prōtostatēn kaiton deuterostatēn histamenous en tę̄ tritę̄ taxei. IAlloi de phasin, ōs eis tas cheiras tōn polemiōn harmata epoioun megala, hōste kai treis chōrein, hina 6 men heis hēniochei, oi de dyo polemousin; ē tous epi triōn hippōn bebēkotas. Oi gar palaioi en tois polemois epi dyoē triōn hippōn epōchounto exiontes harmatēlatai. Ē tristatēn legei ton en tǭ kathezesthai ton basilea, triton histamenon, hētoi tritēn echonta kathedran; oios ēn 6 Dauid para Saoul, hōs en tę̄ prōtę̄ tōn Basileiōn heurē seis. i Ekei etheto autǭ 6 Theos dikaiōmata kai kriseis. kai ekei auton epeirase.» Hote Theos peirazei, epʼ ōpheleią peirazei, ouk epi tǭ kakopoiēsaiʼ dio kai elechthē, hoti i '0 Theos apeirastos esti kakōn, i hōs kai metʼ oliga epagei 6 logosʼ i Ean akoę̄ akousę̄s Kyriou tou Theou sou, pasan noson, hēn epēgagon tois
although the commandment says, “It shall be eaten in one house,” you do not eat in one house. Understand, then, the one house to be the church; never, then, eat of the sheep when you have gone outside the church. [Exod 12:46] “And you shall not carry any of the flesh outside the house.” One must not present the church's teaching outside the church, just as one must not carry the meat outside the house; I mean, into a synagogue of Jews or of heretics; for it is like throwing pearls before swine. [Exod 12:48] “No uncircumcised person shall eat of it.” Every intelligible offspring of the soul that goes beyond material things (the material are the female) must be circumcised and cleansed, so that one may then partake of the flesh of the Passover. And the proselyte becomes like a native of the land; for God does not prefer noble seed, but accepts choice. [Of the same.] He calls uncircumcised in the flesh the one who does not circumcise the things of the flesh, just as uncircumcised in the eyes the one who looks at what he should not. [Of the same.] See that none of you is uncircumcised in heart, that none has failed to be circumcised with the circumcisions which the word teaches. And what are these? Some are reproached for being uncircumcised in their ears; and all who are not circumcised in hearing are unclean. Uncircumcised in lips is the one who does not cut away contrary and unclean words. So also one may call uncircumcised in the flesh the one who does not circumcise the deeds of the flesh; and uncircumcised in the eyes the one who looks at what he should not and does not cleanse his sight; and uncircumcised in the flesh the one who does what he should not. [Exod 13:20] “And the sons of Israel set out from Succoth and camped at Etham beside the desert.” In Numbers it is said that the sons of Israel camped “from Boutha to the mouth of Hiroth, which is opposite Baal-zephon, toward the north.” [Exod 14:7] “And he took six hundred chosen chariots, and all the cavalry of the Egyptians, and tristatai over all.” Those able to fight against three; or those who stand in the battle line in the third rank, after the front-rank man and the second-rank man. Others say that they made chariots large enough for battle to hold three, so that one drives and two fight; or those mounted on three horses, for in wars the ancients rode out as charioteers drawn by two or three horses. Or he calls tristates the one who stands third when the king is seated, that is, who has the third seat; as David was beside Saul, as you will find in the first book of Kingdoms. [Exod 15:25] “There God set for him ordinances and judgments, and there he tested him.” When God tests, he tests for benefit, not to do harm; therefore it was also said, “God is untempted by evils,” as the word also adds a little later: “If you listen attentively to the voice of the Lord your God, every disease which I brought upon the
Chapter 289
289PG 12:289a–289d
Αἰγυπτίοις, οὐκ ἐπάξω ἐπὶ σέ. ι 'O οῦν φέρων τοὺς τ πειρασμοὺς γενναίως, στεφανοῦται. Ἀλλο δέ ἐστιν ἐπὶ τοῦ διαβόλου· ἐκεῖνος γὰρ πειράζει, ἵνα τοὺς πειθομένους αὐτῷ θανατώσῃ· καὶ 6 μὲν Θεὸς πειράζει οὐκ ἀγνοῶν τὸ ἐσόμενον, πλὴν διδοὺς τῷ άνορώπῳ πράττειν ὃ θέλει διὰ τὸ αὐτεξούσιον. ι Τοῦτο τὸ ῥῆμα ὃ ἐλάλησε Κύριος Σάββατα, ἀνά· παυσις ἁγία τῷ Κυρίῳ αῠριον. ι Ἀπογράφομαι τὰ περὶ τοῦ σαββάτου εἰρημέναι πρῶτον κατὰ τὸ ῥητὸν, ἵνʼ ἴδωσι τί σημαίνει τὸ γράμμα· δεύτερον δέ κατὰ τὴν ἀναγωγὴν, καθʼ ἣν εἴποιμι ἂν ἡμέραν σαββάτου ἐνεστηκέναι τῷ δικαίῳ καταλύσαντι τὰ τοῦ κόσμου ἔργα. καὶ δοξάζοντι τὸν Θεὸν, καὶ σχολάζοντι, μήτε τοῦ τόπου ὲν ᾧ ἕστηκε τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἀφισταμένῳ* μήτε πῦρ καίοντι, κατά τὸ μηδὲν ἁμαρτάνειν· μήτε βαστάγματα αἵροντι. Βάσταγμα ὅρους βαρύτερον πᾶσα ἁμαρτία· διὸ ἔλεγεν 6 Ὑμνῳδὸς· ι Ὡσεὶ φορτίον βαρὺ ἐβαρύνθησαν ἐπʼ ἐμέ. ι Ἑτέρα δὲ ἀπογραφὴ ἂν εἴη σαββάτου, καθʼ ἣν ι ἀπολείπεται σαββατισμὸς τῷ λαῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ι ἀνάπαυσις ίερά καὶ ἁγία. ὐ δέ ποιήσας πάντα τά ἔργα αὐτοῦ, ἄξιος κρίνεται ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτουʼ σχολάζων οὐδενὶ ἢ τῇ θεωρίᾳ τῆς ἀληθείας, καὶ τῆς σοφίας. Ταῦτα δὲ διὰ τὸ μεμνῆσθαι ἐνταῦθα τὸν Μωῦσέα περὶ, τοῦ σαββατίζειν, παρεθέμεθα. ι Καὶ πατάξεις τὴν πέτραν, καὶ ἐξελεύσεται ἐξ αὐτῆς ὕδωρ. ι Πέτρᾳ παρεικάζεται 6 Χριστὸς διὰ τὸ ἄσειστον καὶ άκλόνητον. Ἐρήρεισται γάρ ἐν τοῖς ἁγαοοίς ἡ θεία τε καὶ ὑπερτάτη φύσις. ι Ἐγὼ γάρ είμι Κύριος 6 Θεός σου, Θεὸς ζηλωτὴς, ἀποδιδοὺς ἁμαρτίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα, ἐπὶ τρίτην καὶ τετάρτην γενεὰν τοῖς μισοῦσί με, καὶ ποιῶν ἕλεος είς χιλιάδας τοῖς ἀγαπῶσί με, καὶ τοῖς φυλάσσουσι τά προστάγματα μου. ι Τίνα τοῦτο τὸ ῥητὸν οὐκ ὲτάραξεν; Εἰ ἥμαρτε μὲν 6 πατὴρ, 6 δέ υίὸς, καὶ ἡ τρίτη, καὶ ἡ τετάρτη γενεὰ ἀπολαμβάνει τὴν ἀμαρτίαν, ὡς τοὺς μὲν κατηγορῆσαι καὶ τοῦ δεδωκότος τοὺς νόμους Θεοῦ· τοὺς δέ μὴ κατηγορῆσαι μὲν, ἀληθῶς δὲ ἐλπίζειν τοιαῦτά τινα, καὶ προσδοκᾷν, ὅτι τά ἁμαρτήματα αὐτῶν οἱ υἱοὶ ἀπολαμβάνουσιν. Ἰουδαῖοι ταῦτα νομίζουσιν, οὐκ ἀπαλλάττοντες ἄλλον Θεὸν. Σαμαρεῖς ταῦτα ὑπολαμβάνουσιν, ὼς καὶ αὐτοὶ δοξάζοντες μετεσχηκέναι τοῦ ἐνὸς Θεοῦ. Οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν αίρέσεων οὐκ ἀρεσκόμενοι τῷ ἀγαθὸν ἢ δίκαιον εἶναι Θεὸν δύνασθαι, τὸν ἀποδιδόντα ἁμαρτίας πατέρων είς κόλπον τέκνων αὐτῶν, λέγουσιν, ὃτι 6 τοῦ νόμου Θεὸς οὐκ ἐστι δίκαιος, οὐκ ἔστιν ἀγαθὸς, ἀποδιδοὺς τά ἁμαρτήματα τῶν πατέρων ἐπί τοὺς υἱούς · ἀλλά τις ἐστὶν ἐκείνου μείζων οεός. Ὀ δὲ ὲκκλησιαστικὸς, οὔτε ὡς Ἰουδαῖος σωματικῶς ἀκούει τῶν λεγομένων, οὔτε ὡς αἱρετικὸς ἀναπλάσσει ἄλλον, ἀλλʼ ἕστηκεν ἀμφοτέρων μέσος, καὶ λέγει καλῶς μὲν ταῦτα γε·γράφθαν οὐκ οἶδα δὲ τῶν γεγραμμένων τὸν νοῦν. Ἀνατείνατε οὖντὰς διανοίας πάντες, καὶ αἰτήσασοε, ἵνα ὑμῖν ἀποκαλύψῃ ὡς ἁγαθός ἐστιν, 6 ἀποδιδοὺς ἁμαρτίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα. Τίνες οἱ πατέρες; φέρε τὰς Γραφάς μάρτυρας· ἐξετασθήτωσαν τὰ λόγια
Aigyptiois, ouk epaxō epi se. i 'O oun pherōn tous t peirasmous gennaiōs, stephanoutai. Allo de estin epi tou diabolou; ekeinos gar peirazei, hina tous peithomenous autǭ thanatōsę̄; kai 6 men Theos peirazei ouk agnoōn to esomenon, plēn didous tǭ anorōpǭ prattein ho thelei dia to autexousion. i Touto to rhēma ho elalēse Kyrios Sabbata, ana; pausis hagia tǭ Kyriǭ aurion. i Apographomai ta peri tou sabbatou eirēmenai prōton kata to rhēton, hinʼ idōsi ti sēmainei to gramma; deuteron de kata tēn anagōgēn, kathʼ hēn eipoimi an hēmeran sabbatou enestēkenai tǭ dikaiǭ katalysanti ta tou kosmou erga. kai doxazonti ton Theon, kai scholazonti, mēte tou topou en hǭ hestēke tou Christou, aphistamenǭ* mēte pyr kaionti, kata to mēden hamartanein; mēte bastagmata haironti. Bastagma horous baryteron pasa hamartia; dio elegen 6 Hymnǭdos; i Hōsei phortion bary ebarynthēsan epʼ eme. i Hetera de apographē an eiē sabbatou, kathʼ hēn i apoleipetai sabbatismos tǭ laǭ tou Theou, i anapausis iera kai hagia. y de poiēsas panta ta erga autou, axios krinetai ekeinou tou sabbatouʼ scholazōn oudeni ē tę̄ theōrią tēs alētheias, kai tēs sophias. Tauta de dia to memnēsthai entautha ton Mōysea peri, tou sabbatizein, parethemetha. i Kai pataxeis tēn petran, kai exeleusetai ex autēs hydōr. i Petrą pareikazetai 6 Christos dia to aseiston kai aklonēton. Erēreistai gar en tois hagaoois hē theia te kai hypertatē physis. i Egō gar eimi Kyrios 6 Theos sou, Theos zēlōtēs, apodidous hamartias paterōn epi tekna, epi tritēn kai tetartēn genean tois misousi me, kai poiōn heleos eis chiliadas tois agapōsi me, kai tois phylassousi ta prostagmata mou. i Tina touto to rhēton ouk etaraxen? Ei hēmarte men 6 patēr, 6 de uios, kai hē tritē, kai hē tetartē genea apolambanei tēn amartian, hōs tous men katēgorēsai kai tou dedōkotos tous nomous Theou; tous de mē katēgorēsai men, alēthōs de elpizein toiauta tina, kai prosdokąn, hoti ta hamartēmata autōn hoi huioi apolambanousin. Ioudaioi tauta nomizousin, ouk apallattontes allon Theon. Samareis tauta hypolambanousin, ōs kai autoi doxazontes meteschēkenai tou enos Theou. Hoi apo tōn aireseōn ouk areskomenoi tǭ agathon ē dikaion einai Theon dynasthai, ton apodidonta hamartias paterōn eis kolpon teknōn autōn, legousin, hoti 6 tou nomou Theos ouk esti dikaios, ouk estin agathos, apodidous ta hamartēmata tōn paterōn epi tous huious ; alla tis estin ekeinou meizōn oeos. O de ekklēsiastikos, oute hōs Ioudaios sōmatikōs akouei tōn legomenōn, oute hōs hairetikos anaplassei allon, allʼ hestēken amphoterōn mesos, kai legei kalōs men tauta ge;graphthan ouk oida de tōn gegrammenōn ton noun. Anateinate ountas dianoias pantes, kai aitēsasoe, hina hymin apokalypsę̄ hōs hagathos estin, 6 apodidous hamartias paterōn epi tekna. Tines hoi pateres? phere tas Graphas martyras; exetasthētōsan ta logia
Egyptians I will not bring upon you.” The one who bears trials nobly, then, is crowned. But it is otherwise with the devil: he tempts so as to put to death those who obey him. And God tests, not as ignorant of what will be, but as giving man leave to do what he wills, because of his free will. [Exod 16:23] “This is the word which the Lord spoke: Tomorrow is the Sabbath, a holy rest to the Lord.” I set down what is said about the Sabbath, first according to the letter, so that they may see what the letter signifies; and second according to the higher sense, in which I would say that a day of Sabbath has arrived for the righteous man who has put an end to the works of the world and glorifies God and is at leisure: neither departing from the place in which he stands, Christ, nor kindling fire, in the sense of committing no sin, nor lifting burdens. Every sin is a burden heavier than a mountain; therefore the Psalmist said, “Like a heavy burden they weighed upon me.” And another account of the Sabbath would be that in which “a Sabbath rest remains for the people of God,” a sacred and holy rest. The one who has done all his works is judged worthy of that Sabbath, being at leisure for nothing but the contemplation of truth and wisdom. These things we have set forth because Moses here mentions keeping the Sabbath. [Exod 17:6] “And you shall strike the rock, and water shall come out of it.” Christ is likened to a rock because he is unshaken and immovable; for the divine and supreme nature is firmly fixed in the good. [Exod 20:5–6] “For I am the Lord your God, a jealous God, repaying the sins of fathers upon children to the third and fourth generation of those who hate me, and showing mercy to thousands of those who love me and keep my commandments.” Whom has this text not troubled? If the father sinned, then the son and the third and fourth generation receive the sin; so that some even accuse the God who gave the laws, while others do not accuse him, but truly hope for some such thing and expect that their sons will receive the penalty of their sins. The Jews think this, without exchanging their God for another. The Samaritans suppose this, as they too think they have a share in the one God. Those from the heresies, not content that a God who repays the sins of fathers into the bosom of their children can be good or just, say that the God of the law is not just, is not good, since he repays the sins of fathers upon the sons, but that there is another God greater than he. But the churchman neither hears what is said in a bodily way, like a Jew, nor fashions another God, like a heretic, but stands midway between both and says: These things are well written, but I do not know the meaning of what is written. Lift up your minds, then, all of you, and ask that it may be revealed to you how he is good who repays the sins of fathers upon children. Who are the fathers? Bring the Scriptures as witnesses; let the holy oracles
Chapter 291
291PG 12:292a–292d
τὰ ἱερὰ. Λέγει 6 Σωτὴρ καὶ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν, ὅτι ι Ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς τοῦ διαβόλου ἐστὲ, καὶ τὰς ἐπιθυμίας τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν θέλετε ποιῆσαι. Ἐκεῖνος ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἐστὶν ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ οὐχ ἕστηκεν. ι Οὐκοῦν εἴ τις ἁμαρτάνει, ὲκ τοῦ πατρὸς τοῦ διαβόλου ἐστὶ, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τὺ ἁμάρτημα τοῦ διαβόλου ἀποδίδοται ἐπὶ τὸν υἱόν. Πλὴν ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν 6 πρῶτος ἀμαρτωλὸς,ὁ ὑποβαλών μοι τδἁμάρτημα· ἐγὼ δέ εἰμι 6 δεύτερος ἁμαρτωλὸς, 6 μὴ ὲκβιλὼν τὸ βούλημα αὑ. τοῦ, ἀλλὰ παραδεξάμενος αὑτοῦ τὴν ἐνέργειαν · δέοι με στῆναι καθωπλισμένον τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ ἔχοντα 16v θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως, ἵνα πάντα τὰ βέλη τοῦ πονηροῦ τὰ πεπυρωμένα σβεσοῇ ὲν τῷ ουρεῷ τῆς πίστεως μου. Ἐὰν οὖν ἁμαρτάνω, ποιῶ τὰ τοῦ διαβόλου βεβληκότος είς τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα τόδε 16 ἁμάρτημα, ἢ τόδε ποιήσω. Πρῶτον παραδέχομαι αὐτοῦ 16 βέλος, καὶ ὅταν παραδέξωμαι αὐτὸ, τότε καὶαύτὸν παραδέχομαι. Καὶ γὰρ ἐπὶ τοῦ ’ἰούδα οὕτω γέγραπται, ὅτι οὐ πρῶτον εἰσῆλθεν 6 Σατανᾶς εἰς αὐτὸν, ἀλλά πρῶτον τοῦ διαβόλου βεβληκότος εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἵνα παραδῷ αὑτὸν Ἰούδας Σίμων 6 Ἰσκαριώτης, εἶτα μετά τὸ ψωμίον εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτὸν 6 Σατανᾶς. Οὐκοῦν ἔχω πατέρα, εί μὲν ἅγιός εἰμι, Θεὸν· εἰ δὲ ἁμαρτωλός εἰμι, τὸν διάβολον ἔχω πατέρα· ἀλλά καὶ τὸν προσεχῶς φέρε εἰπεῖν ἐνεργήσαντα Ἀντίχριστον,ἢ ἄγγελόν τινα τοῦ διαβόλου, ἢ δαιμόνιον, οὗ τὴν ἐνέργειαν παρεδεξάμην. Καὶ ἁπαξαπλῶς εἰσί μοι πατέρες μυρίοι, ἐὰν γένωμαι ἁμαρτωλός· ὥσπερ πάλιν ἐὰν γένωμαι δίκαιος, πατήρ μου ὲστὶν ὁ Θεὸς, καθάπερ φησὶν 6 Σωτὴρ, ι Τεκνία. ἔτι μικρὸν μεθʼ ὑμῶν είμι. ι Καὶ πάλιν, ι Θύγατερ, ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέ σε. ι Καὶ πάλιν, «Τέκνον, ἀφέωνταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ι Οὕτως οἶδα καὶ ἀλλους πατέρας, κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον τῷ Ἀβραάμ· «Σὺ δὲ ἀπελεύσῃ πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας σου· ι οὐ πρὸς τοὺς κατὰ σάρκα πατέρας· οὐ γὰρ ἦσαν πιστοὶ, οὐκ ἦσαν ἅγιοι, ὠς δῆλον ὲκ τῆς ἱστορίας τῆς γεγραμμένης περὶ αὐτῶν. Εἰ γὰρ ἅγιος αὐτοῦ 6 πατὴρ, οὐκ ἂν ἐλέγετο αὐτῷ, (Ἔξελθε ὲκ τῆς γῆς σου, καὶ ὲκ τῆς συΥΥ“ νείας σου, καὶ ὲκ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ πατρός σου. ι Ἔχει γὰρ 6 λόγος 16 σωματικὸν, ἔχει καὶ τὸ πνευματικόν. El νενόηκας τοὺς πατέρας, ὅρα λοιπὸν ὅτι ἀπολαμβάνεις σὺ, 6 παραδεξάμενος τὴν ἐνέργειαν, διὰ 16 ἡμαρτηκέναι, ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου, ἦ τινος τῶν ὑπʼ αὐτὸν πνευμάτων. Γενόμενος οὖν ἐκείνων υίὸς, ἀπολαμβάνεις ἀπὸ ἀγαθοῦ Θεοῦ σε ἐπισκεπτομένου. Οὐ γὰρ ἐπισκέπτεται τὸν πατέρα σου, ἀλλʼ ἐπισκέπτεταί σε, καί λέγει σοι, ε Ἄκουσον, Θύγατερ, καὶ ἴδε, καὶ κλῖνον 16 οὖς σου, ι καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς· καὶ δίδωσί σοι ὡς ἀγαθός. Ἑπισκέπτεται γάρ σε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ πονηροῦ πατρὸς, τὰ ἁμαρτήματα ἀποδιδούς. ι Ἐπισκέψομαι οὖν ὲν ράβδῳ τὰς ἀνομίας ι ὑμῶν τῶν ἁγίων· ἐπισκέψομαι δὲ ι καὶ ὲν μάστιξι τὰς ἀδικίας αὐτῶν. ι Διὰ τί; ἵνα 16 ι ἔλεός μου μὴ διασκεδάσω ἀπʼ αὐτῶν. ι Ὅτε γὰρ και
ta hiera. Legei 6 Sōtēr kai Kyrios Iēsous Christos tois hamartanousin, hoti i Hymeis ek tou patros tou diabolou este, kai tas epithymias tou patros hymōn thelete poiēsai. Ekeinos anthrōpoktonos estin apʼ archēs, kai en tę̄ alētheią ouch hestēken. i Oukoun ei tis hamartanei, ek tou patros tou diabolou esti, kai dia touto ty hamartēma tou diabolou apodidotai epi ton huion. Plēn ekeinos estin 6 prōtos amartōlos,ho hypobalōn moi tdamartēma; egō de eimi 6 deuteros hamartōlos, 6 mē ekbilōn to boulēma hau. tou, alla paradexamenos hautou tēn energeian ; deoi me stēnai kathōplismenon tēn panoplian tou Theou, kai echonta 16v thyreon tēs pisteōs, hina panta ta belē tou ponērou ta pepyrōmena sbesoę̄ en tǭ oureǭ tēs pisteōs mou. Ean oun hamartanō, poiō ta tou diabolou beblēkotos eis tēn kardian, hina tode 16 hamartēma, ē tode poiēsō. Prōton paradechomai autou 16 belos, kai hotan paradexōmai auto, tote kaiauton paradechomai. Kai gar epi tou ’iouda houtō gegraptai, hoti ou prōton eisēlthen 6 Satanas eis auton, alla prōton tou diabolou beblēkotos eis tēn kardian hina paradǭ hauton Ioudas Simōn 6 Iskariōtēs, eita meta to psōmion eisēlthen eis auton 6 Satanas. Oukoun echō patera, ei men hagios eimi, Theon; ei de hamartōlos eimi, ton diabolon echō patera; alla kai ton prosechōs phere eipein energēsanta Antichriston,ē angelon tina tou diabolou, ē daimonion, hou tēn energeian paredexamēn. Kai hapaxaplōs eisi moi pateres myrioi, ean genōmai hamartōlos; hōsper palin ean genōmai dikaios, patēr mou estin ho Theos, kathaper phēsin 6 Sōtēr, i Teknia. eti mikron methʼ hymōn eimi. i Kai palin, i Thygater, hē pistis sou sesōke se. i Kai palin, «Teknon, apheōntai sou hai hamartiai, i Houtōs oida kai allous pateras, kata to gegrammenon tǭ Abraam; «Sy de apeleusę̄ pros tous pateras sou; i ou pros tous kata sarka pateras; ou gar ēsan pistoi, ouk ēsan hagioi, ōs dēlon ek tēs historias tēs gegrammenēs peri autōn. Ei gar hagios autou 6 patēr, ouk an elegeto autǭ, (Exelthe ek tēs gēs sou, kai ek tēs syYY“ neias sou, kai ek tou oikou tou patros sou. i Echei gar 6 logos 16 sōmatikon, echei kai to pneumatikon. El nenoēkas tous pateras, hora loipon hoti apolambaneis sy, 6 paradexamenos tēn energeian, dia 16 hēmartēkenai, hypo tou diabolou, ē tinos tōn hypʼ auton pneumatōn. Genomenos oun ekeinōn uios, apolambaneis apo agathou Theou se episkeptomenou. Ou gar episkeptetai ton patera sou, allʼ episkeptetai se, kai legei soi, e Akouson, Thygater, kai ide, kai klinon 16 ous sou, i kai ta hexēs; kai didōsi soi hōs agathos. Hepiskeptetai gar se ton huion tou ponērou patros, ta hamartēmata apodidous. i Episkepsomai oun en rabdǭ tas anomias i hymōn tōn hagiōn; episkepsomai de i kai en mastixi tas adikias autōn. i Dia ti? hina 16 i eleos mou mē diaskedasō apʼ autōn. i Hote gar kai
be examined. The Saviour and Lord Jesus Christ says to sinners: “You are of your father the devil, and you wish to do your father's desires. He was a murderer from the beginning, and did not stand in the truth.” So if anyone sins, he is of his father the devil, and for this reason the devil's sin is repaid upon the son. He, however, is the first sinner, who suggested the sin to me; and I am the second sinner, who did not cast out his will but accepted his working, when I ought to have stood armed with the full armour of God and holding the shield of faith, so that all the flaming darts of the evil one might be quenched by the shield of my faith. If, then, I sin, I do the things of the devil, who has cast into my heart that I should commit this sin or that. First I accept his dart, and when I have accepted it, then I accept him too. For so it is written in the case of Judas: Satan did not enter into him first, but first the devil had cast into the heart of Judas Simon Iscariot that he should betray him; then, after the morsel, Satan entered into him. So I have a father: if I am holy, God; if I am a sinner, I have the devil as father, and also, say, the one who worked in me directly, the Antichrist, or some angel of the devil, or a demon, whose working I accepted. In short, I have countless fathers if I become a sinner; just as, again, if I become righteous, my father is God, as the Saviour says: “Little children, yet a little while I am with you”; and again, “Daughter, your faith has saved you”; and again, “Child, your sins are forgiven.” So too I know other fathers, according to what is written to Abraham: “But you shall go to your fathers”; not to his fathers according to the flesh, for they were not faithful, they were not holy, as is clear from the history written about them. For if his father had been holy, it would not have been said to him, “Go out from your land and from your kindred and from your father's house.” For the word has the bodily sense, and it has the spiritual too. If you have understood who the fathers are, see now that it is you who receive the penalty, you who accepted the working from the devil, or from one of the spirits under him, and so sinned. Having become their son, then, you receive it from the good God, who visits you. For he does not visit your father, but visits you, and says to you, “Hear, daughter, and see, and incline your ear,” and so on; and he gives to you as one who is good. For he visits you, the son of the evil father, repaying the sins: “I will visit with a rod the transgressions” of you saints, “and with scourges their iniquities.” Why? So that “I may not scatter my mercy from them.” For when he
Chapter 293
293PG 12:293a–293d
ἓῧῦ ταλίπῃ τινὰ, οὐκέτι αὐτὸν κολάζει, οὔτε μαστιγοῖ. ι Μαστιγοῖ › γὰρ ού πάντας, ἀλλὰ ε πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται Ιῄύριος. ι Καὶ λέγεται ἐν τῷ προφήτῃ περὶτῶν πάνυ ἁμαρτωλῶν· ι Οὐκ ἐπισκέψομαι ἐπὶ τὰς θυγατέρας ὑμῶν ὅταν πορνεύσωσι, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς νύμφας ὑμῶν ὅταν μοιχευθῶσι. ι Τοσούτῳ χρόνῳ 6 διάβολος ἁμαρτάνει ἀπὸ κτίσεως, καὶ καταβολῆς κόσμου, καὶ οὔτε πῦρ, οὕτε μάστιξ -ού γάρ ἄξιός ἐστι τῶν κολάσεων τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ. Οὐ γάρ δύναται εἰπεῖν 6 διάόοιιος, ι Κύριε, μὴ τῷ θυμῷ σου ἐλέγξῃς με, ι καὶ τά ἑξῆς. Ἕκαστος οὖν συνειδὼς ἑαυτῷ ἁμαρτίας, εὐχέσθω κολασθῆναι. Καλὸν μὲν γὰρ τὸ μηδὲν ἄξιον κολάσεως πεποιηκέναι. Εἰ δέ τι ἄξιον κολάσεως πεποιήκαμεν, οὕτω κολασθῶμεν, ὥστε ἑνθάδε μὲν ἀπολαβεῖν, μετὰ δέ ταῦτα εἰς τοὺς κόλπους Ἀβραὰμ ἀναπαύσασθαι. ε Καὶ ταῦτα τὰ δικαιώματά μου, ά παραθήσῃ ἐνὼπιον αὐτῶν. Ἐὰν κτήσῃ παῖδα Ἐβραῖον,ικα“ι τὰ ἑξῆς. Ἀναγκαῖον ἐξετάσαι τί νόμος, καί τί πρόσταγμα, τί δέ δικαιώματα, καὶ κρίματα, καὶ μαρτύρια, καὶ ἐντολαί. Δικαιώματα μὲν οὖν ἐστι, τὸ ἐνθάδε εἰρημένον, ι Ἐὰν κτήσῃ παῖδα Ἐβραῖον, ι καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς, περὶ αὐτοῦ εἰρημένα · κρίμα δέ, ἵνα ἱερέως θυγάτηρ ἐὰν μοιχευθῇ, πυρὶ κατακαίηται ° ἐντολαὶ δὲ, ι Οὐκ ἔσονταί σοι θεοὶ ἕτεροι· ο πρόσταγμα δὲ, ι Καταβάς διαμάρτυραι τῷ λαῷ, καὶ πλυνάτωσαν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν· ι μαρτύρια δὲ, ι Διαμαρτύρομαι ὑμῖν σήμερον τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν. ι ι Ἓξ ἔτη δουλεύσει σοι · τῷ δέ ἑτει τῷ ἑβδόμῳ, ἀπελεύσεται ἐλεύθερος δωρεάν. ι Σημαίνει ή ἐν τῷ ἑβδόμῳ ἐλευθέρωσις, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ τῶν ἔργων κατάπαυσις τὴν ἐν χάριτι ἡμῖν διὰ Χριστοῦ ἐλευθε ρίαν. ι Προσάξει αὐτὸν 6 κύριος αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸ κριτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ. ι Ἀκύλας καὶ Σύμμαχος εἷπον, ι πρὸς τοὺς θεούς. ι Θεοὺς δὲ τοὺς κριτὰς ὀνομάζουσι, καὶ θεοῦ κριτήριον, τὴν τούτων ψῆφον. ι Τρεῖς καιροὺς τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἑορτάσατέ μοι. Τὴν ἑορτὴν τῶν ἀζύμων φυλάξασθε. Ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας ἕδεσοε ἄζυμα, καθάπερ ἐνετειλάμην σοι, κατά τὸν καιρὸν -τοῦ μηνὸς τῶν νέων. Ἑν γὰρ αύτῷ ἐξῆλθες ἐξ Alγύπι-ου. Οὐκ ὁφθήσῃ ἐνώπιόν μου κενὸς, καὶ ἑορτὴν τοῦ θερισμοῦ πρωτογεννημάτων ποιήσεις τῶν ἔργων σου. ι Αἱ ἑορταὶ τοίνυν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οἷς ἐστι πνεῦμα, πνευματικαί εισι· καὶ οὐδεὶς χοῖκὸς ἑορτάζει τὰς ἑορτὰς πνευματικῶς. ι Τίς γὰρ συμφωνία δικαιοσύσ νης καὶ ἀνομίας ;ι ἵνα μὴ τὰ ἑξῆς λέγω. Οὐ δύναται χοῖκὸς ἑορτάσαι ἑορτὰς πνευματικὰς, ὥσπερ οὐδὲ πνευματικὸς ἑορτὴν χοῖκήν. Καὶ μετʼ ὀλίγα. Τί ἐστιν 6 μὴν τῶν νέων; τοὺς αἰσθητοὺς φήσεις καρι πούς οὔπω ἐνέστηκεν ὁ μὴν τῶν νέων, τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ φέρε εἰπεῖν ὀψιμωτέρου ὗντος. Τὸ δὲ, ἐὰν γένηταί ποτε ἐνιαυτὸς, ὥστε μηδὲ φέρειν τὴν γῆν τοὺς καρποὺς, ἆρα δυνάμεθα ἑορτάζειν ἐν τῷ μηνὶ τῶν νέων, ὡς κεκέλευκεν 6 Θεὸς ἑορτάζειν τοὺς ἑορτάζοντας Οὐκοῦν δεῖ κατʼ ἐνιαυτὸν τὴν ἑορτὴν ἑορτάζειν. Ἐπαπορῶ δὲ πάλιν,καὶ περὶ τοῦ δευτέρου νόμου, τοῦ κατὰ τὴν ἑορτὴν τὴν δευτέραν. Φησὶ γὰρ ι ἑορτὴν τοῦ θερισμοῦ τῶν πρωτογεννημάτωνοιἘάν τις σπείρῃ, καὶ μὴ γένωνται οἱ καρποὶ πρῶτοι, ἀλλὰ τελευταῖοι,
heÿy talipę̄ tina, ouketi auton kolazei, oute mastigoi. i Mastigoi › gar ou pantas, alla e panta huion hon paradechetai Ię̄urios. i Kai legetai en tǭ prophētę̄ peritōn pany hamartōlōn; i Ouk episkepsomai epi tas thygateras hymōn hotan porneusōsi, kai epi tas nymphas hymōn hotan moicheuthōsi. i Tosoutǭ chronǭ 6 diabolos hamartanei apo ktiseōs, kai katabolēs kosmou, kai oute pyr, houte mastix -ou gar axios esti tōn kolaseōn tōn apo tou Theou. Ou gar dynatai eipein 6 diaooiios, i Kyrie, mē tǭ thymǭ sou elenxę̄s me, i kai ta hexēs. Hekastos oun syneidōs heautǭ hamartias, euchesthō kolasthēnai. Kalon men gar to mēden axion kolaseōs pepoiēkenai. Ei de ti axion kolaseōs pepoiēkamen, houtō kolasthōmen, hōste henthade men apolabein, meta de tauta eis tous kolpous Abraam anapausasthai. e Kai tauta ta dikaiōmata mou, a parathēsę̄ enōpion autōn. Ean ktēsę̄ paida Ebraion,ika“i ta hexēs. Anankaion exetasai ti nomos, kai ti prostagma, ti de dikaiōmata, kai krimata, kai martyria, kai entolai. Dikaiōmata men oun esti, to enthade eirēmenon, i Ean ktēsę̄ paida Ebraion, i kai ta hexēs, peri autou eirēmena ; krima de, hina hiereōs thygatēr ean moicheuthę̄, pyri katakaiētai ° entolai de, i Ouk esontai soi theoi heteroi; o prostagma de, i Katabas diamartyrai tǭ laǭ, kai plynatōsan ta himatia autōn; i martyria de, i Diamartyromai hymin sēmeron ton ouranon kai tēn gēn. i i Hex etē douleusei soi ; tǭ de hetei tǭ hebdomǭ, apeleusetai eleutheros dōrean. i Sēmainei ē en tǭ hebdomǭ eleutherōsis, eti de kai hē en tǭ sabbatǭ tōn ergōn katapausis tēn en chariti hēmin dia Christou eleuthe rian. i Prosaxei auton 6 kyrios autou pros to kritērion tou Theou. i Akylas kai Symmachos heipon, i pros tous theous. i Theous de tous kritas onomazousi, kai theou kritērion, tēn toutōn psēphon. i Treis kairous tou eniautou heortasate moi. Tēn heortēn tōn azymōn phylaxasthe. Hepta hēmeras hedesoe azyma, kathaper eneteilamēn soi, kata ton kairon -tou mēnos tōn neōn. Hen gar autǭ exēlthes ex Algypi-ou. Ouk hophthēsę̄ enōpion mou kenos, kai heortēn tou therismou prōtogennēmatōn poiēseis tōn ergōn sou. i Hai heortai toinyn tou Theou, hois esti pneuma, pneumatikai eisi; kai oudeis choikos heortazei tas heortas pneumatikōs. i Tis gar symphōnia dikaiosys nēs kai anomias ?i hina mē ta hexēs legō. Ou dynatai choikos heortasai heortas pneumatikas, hōsper oude pneumatikos heortēn choikēn. Kai metʼ oliga. Ti estin 6 mēn tōn neōn? tous aisthētous phēseis kari pous oupō enestēken ho mēn tōn neōn, tou eniautou phere eipein opsimōterou hyntos. To de, ean genētai pote eniautos, hōste mēde pherein tēn gēn tous karpous, ara dynametha heortazein en tǭ mēni tōn neōn, hōs kekeleuken 6 Theos heortazein tous heortazontas Oukoun dei katʼ eniauton tēn heortēn heortazein. Epaporō de palin,kai peri tou deuterou nomou, tou kata tēn heortēn tēn deuteran. Phēsi gar i heortēn tou therismou tōn prōtogennēmatōnoiEan tis speirę̄, kai mē genōntai hoi karpoi prōtoi, alla teleutaioi,
abandons someone, he no longer punishes him nor scourges him. For he scourges not all, but “every son whom the Lord receives.” And it is said in the prophet about those who are utter sinners: “I will not punish your daughters when they commit sexual immorality, nor your brides when they commit adultery.” For so long a time, since the creation and foundation of the world, the devil has been sinning, and neither fire nor scourge comes upon him; for he is not worthy of the punishments that come from God. For the devil cannot say, “Lord, do not rebuke me in your wrath,” and so on. Let each one, then, who is conscious of sins pray to be punished. It is good to have done nothing worthy of punishment; but if we have done something worthy of punishment, let us be punished in such a way that we receive it here, and after this rest in the bosom of Abraham. [Exod 21:1–2] “And these are my statutes, which you shall set before them: If you buy a Hebrew servant,” and so on. It is necessary to examine what law is, and what an ordinance, and what statutes, judgments, testimonies, and commandments are. Statutes, then, are what is said here, “If you buy a Hebrew servant,” and what follows about him; a judgment, that if a priest's daughter commits adultery she is to be burned with fire; commandments, “You shall have no other gods”; an ordinance, “Go down and charge the people, and let them wash their garments”; testimonies, “I call heaven and earth to witness against you today.” [Exod 21:2] “Six years he shall serve you; but in the seventh year he shall go out free, for nothing.” The release in the seventh year, and also the rest from works on the Sabbath, signify the freedom given to us in grace through Christ. [Exod 21:6] “His master shall bring him to the judgment seat of God.” Aquila and Symmachus said “to the gods.” They call the judges gods, and their vote God's judgment seat. [Exod 23:14–16] “Three times in the year keep a feast to me. Keep the feast of unleavened bread; seven days you shall eat unleavened bread, as I commanded you, at the time of the month of new things, for in it you came out of Egypt. You shall not appear before me empty. And you shall keep the feast of the harvest of the first-fruits of your works.” The feasts of God, then, for those who have the Spirit, are spiritual; and no earthy man keeps the feasts spiritually. “For what fellowship has righteousness with lawlessness?” not to quote what follows. An earthy man cannot keep spiritual feasts, just as a spiritual man cannot keep an earthy feast. And a little later. What is the month of new things? If you say the perceptible fruits, the month of new things has not yet come when the year, say, is late. And if there should ever be a year in which the earth bears no fruits at all, can we keep the feast in the month of new things, as God commanded those who keep the feast? Yet the feast must be kept every year. I raise a difficulty again about the second law too, concerning the second feast. For it says, “the feast of the harvest of the first-fruits.” If someone sows, and his fruits come not first but last,
Chapter 295
295PG 12:296a–296d
οὗτος οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο ἑορτάσαι τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ Θερισμοῦ τῶν πρυπογεννημάτων.Δεῖ γὰρ ἔχειν σε γεννήματα, ἵνα δυνηθῇς ἑορτάζειν. Τί δὲ, ἂν χώραν μὴ ἔχω, πῶς ἂν δυναίμην τὴν ἑορτὴν ταύτην ἑορτάζειν, τῆς λέξεως λεγούσης, ι Καὶ ἑορτήν θερισμοῦ τῶν πρωτογεννημάτων ποιήσεις τῶν ἔργων σου, ὧν ἐὰν σπείρης ἐν τῷ ἀγρῴ σονς ι οὐκ ἔσπειρα, οἱκοδόμος εἰμί· οὐκ ἔσπειρα, ὑφάντης είμί ἀγρὸν οὐκ ἔχω, πῶς δύναμαι τὴν δευτέραν ἑορτάζειν ἑορτήν; Καὶ δὴ καὶ περὶ τὴν τρίτην, ι Καὶ ἑορτὴν συντελείας ἐπʼ ἐξόδῳ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ. ι Καὶ μεθʼ ἕτερα. Τί βούλεται λόγος ἡμῖν λέγειν ὁ κελεύων ἡ μᾶς ἑορτάζειν τήν ἑορτὴν τῶν ἀζύμων τῷ μηνὶ τῶν νέων; Ἀπόθου τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον σὺν ταῖς πράξεσιν αὑτοῦ. Καὶ ἴνα γε ποιήσῃς τὴν ἑορτὴν ἐν τῷ μηνὶ τῶν νέων, καὶ συ νέος γενοῦ, ἵνα γένηται ὁ μὴν τῆς ἑορτῆς τῶν νέων, καὶ σὸς μήν. Νέων γὰρ, καὶ οὐ παλαιῶν ἑστιν οὗτος ὁ μήν. Πῶς οὖν δεήσει νέον καὶ σὲ γενέσθαι; Νοήσας τὰς ἑορτὰς, τὴν ἑορτὴν τῶν νέων ὁ ἀπόστολος Παῦλός φησιν, ι Ἐκδυνσάμενοι τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον σὺν ταῖς πράξεσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐνδυσάμενοι τὸν νέον τὸν ἀνακαινούμενον είς ἐπίγνωσιν κατʼ εἰκόνα τοῦ κτίσαντος. ι Οὐκοῦν ἵνα ἀγάγῃς τὴν ἑορτὴν ἑν μηνὶ τῶν νέων, νέον σε γενέσθαι δεῖ, καὶ πᾶσαν ἀποθέσθαι παλαιότητα. Εἶτα ποίαν ἑορτὴν πρώτην άγεις; ὃτι τὴν topτὴν τῶν ἀζύμων, μάνθανε ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἀποστόλοψ ι Τδ γὰρ πάσχα ἡμῶν, φησὶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐτύθη Χριστόςο ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν μὴ ὲν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ὲν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλʼ ὲν ἀζύμοις είλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας. ι ’Ἅμα δὲ συνάγαγε τὰ νενομοθετημένα περὶ τῆς ἑορτῆς τῶν ἀζύμων, καὶ ὕψει μὲν τδ ἄλογον τῶν τῷ ῥητῷ ὡς πνευματικῷ μὴ προσεχόντων, καταφρονούντων δὲ τῶν πνευματικῶν ὡς μὴ χρησίμων. ‹ Οὐκ ὀφθήσῃ ἐνώπιόν μου κενός. ι Ἰσθι ὃτι πᾶς ἄνθρωποςῆ κενός ἑστιν, ἧ πλήρης. Ei μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἔχειᾶγιον Πνεῦμα, οὐκ ἔχει γνῶσιν τοῦ κτίσαντος, οὐ παρεδέξατο ζωὴν Ἰησοῦν τὸν Χριστόν· εί οὐκ οἶδε τὸν Πατέρα τὸν ἑν οὐρανοῖς, εἰ οὐ βιοῖ κατὰ τὴν λόεγον, κατὰ τὸν νόμον οὐράνιον οὐ σωφρονεῖ, οὗ δικαιοπραγεῖο ὁ τοιοῦτος κενός ἐστιν. Ei δὲ κεχώρηκε τὺνεὶπόντα Θεὸν· ι Ἐνοικήσω ὲν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐμπεριπατήσω, καὶ ἔσομαι αὐτοῖς Θεὸς, »οὗτος οὐκ ἔστι κε- Ῑ) νὸς, anan πλή ρης. ι Τρεῖς καιροὺς τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ὀφθήσεται πᾶν ἀρσενικόν σου ἐνώπιον Κυρίου τοῦ Θεοῦ σου. ι Τί ἑστιτὸ ῥητὸν εἴποιμι ἄν. Ὅ πράττομεν, ἧ θῆλύ ἑστιν, ἢ ἀρσενικόν. El μὲν οὖν θηλυκόν ἑστιν ὂ ποιοῦμεν, ἢ σωματικόν ἐστιν, ἢ σαρκικόν. Σπείροντες γὰρ εἰς τὴν σάρκα, ποιοῦμεν θῆλυ τὸ γέννημα τῆς ψυχῆς, οὐκ ἄρρεν· ἁλλʼ ὲκνενευρισμένον, ἁπαλόν τε καὶ ὑλικόν. Ei μέντοι βλέποντες τὰ αἰώνια, καὶ πρὸς τοῖς κρείττοσιν ἔχοντες τὴν διάνοιαν, καρποφοροῦμεν τοὺς καρποὺς τοῦ πνεύματος, καὶ πάντα τὰ γεννήματα ἡμῶν spesve ἐστι. Τὰ τοίνυν φερόμενα ἐνώπιον τοῦ
houtos ouk an dynaito heortasai tēn archēn tou Therismou tōn prypogennēmatōn.Dei gar echein se gennēmata, hina dynēthę̄s heortazein. Ti de, an chōran mē echō, pōs an dynaimēn tēn heortēn tautēn heortazein, tēs lexeōs legousēs, i Kai heortēn therismou tōn prōtogennēmatōn poiēseis tōn ergōn sou, hōn ean speirēs en tǭ agrǭ sons i ouk espeira, hoikodomos eimi; ouk espeira, hyphantēs eimi agron ouk echō, pōs dynamai tēn deuteran heortazein heortēn? Kai dē kai peri tēn tritēn, i Kai heortēn synteleias epʼ exodǭ tou eniautou. i Kai methʼ hetera. Ti bouletai logos hēmin legein ho keleuōn hē mas heortazein tēn heortēn tōn azymōn tǭ mēni tōn neōn? Apothou ton palaion anthrōpon syn tais praxesin hautou. Kai ina ge poiēsę̄s tēn heortēn en tǭ mēni tōn neōn, kai sy neos genou, hina genētai ho mēn tēs heortēs tōn neōn, kai sos mēn. Neōn gar, kai ou palaiōn hestin houtos ho mēn. Pōs oun deēsei neon kai se genesthai? Noēsas tas heortas, tēn heortēn tōn neōn ho apostolos Paulos phēsin, i Ekdynsamenoi ton palaion anthrōpon syn tais praxesin autou, kai endysamenoi ton neon ton anakainoumenon eis epignōsin katʼ eikona tou ktisantos. i Oukoun hina agagę̄s tēn heortēn hen mēni tōn neōn, neon se genesthai dei, kai pasan apothesthai palaiotēta. Eita poian heortēn prōtēn ageis? hoti tēn toptēn tōn azymōn, manthane apo tou Apostolops i Td gar pascha hēmōn, phēsin, hyper hēmōn etythē Christoso hōste heortazōmen mē en zymę̄ palaią, mēde en zymę̄ kakias kai ponērias, allʼ en azymois eilikrineias kai alētheias. i ’Hama de synagage ta nenomothetēmena peri tēs heortēs tōn azymōn, kai hypsei men td alogon tōn tǭ rhētǭ hōs pneumatikǭ mē prosechontōn, kataphronountōn de tōn pneumatikōn hōs mē chrēsimōn. ‹ Ouk ophthēsę̄ enōpion mou kenos. i Isthi hoti pas anthrōposē kenos hestin, hē plērēs. Ei men gar ouk echeiagion Pneuma, ouk echei gnōsin tou ktisantos, ou paredexato zōēn Iēsoun ton Christon; ei ouk oide ton Patera ton hen ouranois, ei ou bioi kata tēn loegon, kata ton nomon ouranion ou sōphronei, hou dikaioprageio ho toioutos kenos estin. Ei de kechōrēke tyneiponta Theon; i Enoikēsō en autois, kai emperipatēsō, kai esomai autois Theos, »houtos ouk esti ke- I) nos, anan plē rēs. i Treis kairous tou eniautou ophthēsetai pan arsenikon sou enōpion Kyriou tou Theou sou. i Ti hestito rhēton eipoimi an. Ho prattomen, hē thēly hestin, ē arsenikon. El men oun thēlykon hestin o poioumen, ē sōmatikon estin, ē sarkikon. Speirontes gar eis tēn sarka, poioumen thēly to gennēma tēs psychēs, ouk arren; hallʼ ekneneurismenon, hapalon te kai hylikon. Ei mentoi blepontes ta aiōnia, kai pros tois kreittosin echontes tēn dianoian, karpophoroumen tous karpous tou pneumatos, kai panta ta gennēmata hēmōn spesve esti. Ta toinyn pheromena enōpion tou
he could not keep the beginning of the harvest of first-fruits; for you must have produce in order to be able to keep the feast. And what if I have no land? How could I keep this feast, when the wording says, “And you shall keep the feast of the harvest of the first-fruits of your works, whatever you sow in your field”? I did not sow, I am a builder; I did not sow, I am a weaver; I have no field; how can I keep the second feast? And the same applies to the third: “And the feast of completion at the end of the year.” And after other things. What does the word mean to tell us when it commands us to keep the feast of unleavened bread in the month of new things? Put off the old man with his deeds. And so that you may keep the feast in the month of new things, become new yourself too, so that the month of the feast of new things may be your month as well. For this month belongs to new things, not to old. How, then, will you too need to become new? Having understood the feasts, the feast of new things, the apostle Paul says: “Having put off the old man with his deeds, and having put on the new, which is being renewed unto knowledge according to the image of the one who created him.” So, in order to celebrate the feast in the month of new things, you must become new and put off all oldness. Then, what feast do you keep first? That it is the feast of unleavened bread, learn from the Apostle: “For Christ our Passover,” he says, “was sacrificed for us; so let us keep the feast not with old leaven, nor with the leaven of malice and wickedness, but with the unleavened bread of sincerity and truth.” At the same time gather together what is legislated about the feast of unleavened bread, and you will see the unreasonableness of those who do not attend to the letter as spiritual and who despise spiritual things as useless. [Exod 23:15] “You shall not appear before me empty.” Know that every human being is either empty or full. For if he does not have the Holy Spirit, does not have knowledge of the Creator, has not received the life, Jesus Christ; if he does not know the Father in heaven, does not live according to the Word, is not self-controlled according to the heavenly law, does not act justly, such a one is empty. But if he has made room for the God who said, “I will dwell in them and walk among them, and I will be their God,” he is not empty, but full. [Exod 23:17] “Three times in the year every male of yours shall appear before the Lord your God.” What the text means I would say thus: what we do is either female or male. If what we do is female, it is either bodily or fleshly; for when we sow to the flesh, we make the offspring of the soul female, not male, but unnerved, soft and material. If, however, looking at eternal things and having our mind on the better, we bear the fruits of the Spirit, all our offspring are male. The things, then, brought before the
Chapter 351
351PG 12:351a–351d
(οὑ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ εἴδωλον, οὐδὲ παντὸς ὁμοίωμα.. t Ἀλλο εἴδωλον, καὶ ἕτερον ὁμοίωμα. Ὀμοίωμα μὲν γάρ ἐστιν, ἐὰν ποιῇς ἰχθύος, ἢ τετραπόόου, ἢ Θηρίου διὰ τεχνουργίας, ἢ διὰ ζωγραφίας ὁμοίω μα. Εἴδωλον δὲ, ὅσα ἀκιατυποῦσα ψυχὴ ποιεῖ, οὐκ ἐξ ὑπαρχόντων πρωτοτύπως· οἷον ἀναμεμιγμένον τὸ ζῶον ἀπὸ ἀνθρώπου καὶ ἵππου.
(hou poiēseis seautǭ eidōlon, oude pantos homoiōma.. t Allo eidōlon, kai heteron homoiōma. Omoiōma men gar estin, ean poię̄s ichthyos, ē tetrapooou, ē Thēriou dia technourgias, ē dia zōgraphias homoiō ma. Eidōlon de, hosa akiatypousa psychē poiei, ouk ex hyparchontōn prōtotypōs; hoion anamemigmenon to zōon apo anthrōpou kai hippou.
[Exod 20:4] “You shall not make for yourself an idol, nor a likeness of anything.” An idol is one thing and a likeness another. It is a likeness if you make, by craftsmanship or by painting, a likeness of a fish or a quadruped or a wild beast. An idol is whatever the soul makes when it forms images not from existing things as originals; for instance, the animal mixed of man and horse.
Chapter 395
395PG 12:395a–395d
Kal ἀνεκὰλεσε Μωϋσῆν. Λευῖτικὸν ὠνόμασται, επειδὴ τὸ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ τὰ τῶν θυσιῶν καὶ ὅσα τοιαῦτα προσέταξεν ὁ Θεὸς, ὲν τούτῳ Λευῖτικῴ φέρεται. Ἔχει μὲν οὖν καὶ ἡ Ἔξοδος τοῦ Θεοῦ νομοθεσίας· ὅπως δὲ ὲτελὲσθησαν οἱ ἱερεῖς χρισθέντες, καὶ ὅπως κατεσκευάσθη ὴ σκηνὴ καὶ σύμπηξιν ἔλαβεν ἁρμόνιον, κα“ιʼἄλλα πλείονα ἱστορεῖ τὸ Λευῖτικόν. El δὲ καὶ ἕτερά τινα περιέχει, οὐ θαυμαστὸν, ἐπιγραφὴ γάρ ἐστι, Λευῖτικὸν, τοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ καιριωτέρου δηλωτικόν. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Τὸν περὶ θυσιῶν λόγον οῖ μὴ ὀρθῶς ἐνορῶντες καταφρονοῦσιν ἣ ὡς εὐτελοῦς νομοθεσίας, καὶ μηδὲν ἄξιον τοῦ Δημιουργοῦ ἐχούσης. ἢ αὐτοῦ τοῦ Δημιουργοῦ ὡς εὐτελῆ νομοθετοῦντος ἀσεβῶς κα.ταψηφῐζονται. Ὀ δὲ νοήσας τὸ τοῦ Δαυῖδ καὶ τοῦ Ἀποστόλου, τοῦ μὲν λέγοντος· ‹ Ἀποκὰλυψον τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς μου καὶ κατανοήσω τὰ θαυμάσια ὲκ τοῦ νόμου σου · ι τοῦ δὲ βοῶντος· ι Ὀ νόμος πνευματικός ἐστι, ι δύναται διαβλέψαι ὡς ἄξια Θεοῦ ἐστιν -- ἀποκεκρυμμένα ἐν τούτοις μαθήματα. Ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἐὰν προσαγάγῃ δῶρα τῷ Κυρίῳ.. Τετηρήκαμεν δὲ πολλαχοῦ τῶν Γραφῶν τὰ μὲν δῶρα ἐπὶτῶν ζώων λέγεσθαι, τὰς δὲ θυσίας ἐπὶ τῶν ἀψύχων κατὰ τὸ ἐν τῇ Γενέσει λεγόμενον ο ‹ Καὶ ἐπεῖδεν ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ Ἅβελ, καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς δώροις αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ δὲ Κάϊν καὶ ἐπὶ ταῖς θυσίαις αὑτοῦ ού προσέσχεν. ι Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ῥητέον, ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν ὲμο ψύχων ·ι Ἄνθρωπος, φησὶν, ὲξὺμῶν, ὲὰν προσαγάγῃ δῶρα ο ι ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἀψύχων, ‹ ἐὰν ψυχή. ι Τὸ ἄψυχον ἡ ψυχή · ἴνα τοῦ μὲν ἀλόγου τὸ λογικὸν μόνον καταλείπηται, καὶ τοῦ ἀψύχου ὑπὸ τοῦ πυρὸς νενικημένου ἀπομεξνοι τὸ ἔμψυχον μόνον. Προχεοῦσι τὸ uiua ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον. Θυσιαστήριον καρπώσεως ὁ βωμὸς λέγεται, ἐφʼ οὗ θυσίαι ὁλοκαυτώσεωςδ θυσιαστήριον δὲ θυμιάματος, τὺ ἔσω θυσιαστήριον. ἸὈῦ αὐτοῦ. Ἐπειδὴ ἔχαιρον ταῖς θυσίαις οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι ὲν Αἰγύπτῳ ταύταις προσεθίσαντες, ὡς καὶή ὲν τῇ ἐρήμῳ μοσχοποιία μαρτυρεῖ, ἐπέτρεψεν ὀ Θεὸς ταύτας αὐτῷ προσαγαγεῖν, ταύτῃ χαλινώσας τῆς πολυθεῒας τὰς ἀτάκτους ὁρμὰς καὶ τοῦ μὴ θύειν διιεκ μασι.
Kal anekalese Mōÿsēn. Leuitikon ōnomastai, epeidē to tēs hierōsynēs kai ta tōn thysiōn kai hosa toiauta prosetaxen ho Theos, en toutǭ Leuitikǭ pheretai. Echei men oun kai hē Exodos tou Theou nomothesias; hopōs de etelesthēsan hoi hiereis christhentes, kai hopōs kateskeuasthē ē skēnē kai sympēxin elaben harmonion, ka“iʼalla pleiona historei to Leuitikon. El de kai hetera tina periechei, ou thaumaston, epigraphē gar esti, Leuitikon, tou en autǭ kairiōterou dēlōtikon. Tou hautou. Ton peri thysiōn logon oi mē orthōs enorōntes kataphronousin hē hōs eutelous nomothesias, kai mēden axion tou Dēmiourgou echousēs. ē autou tou Dēmiourgou hōs eutelē nomothetountos asebōs ka.tapsēphizontai. O de noēsas to tou Dauid kai tou Apostolou, tou men legontos; ‹ Apokalypson tous ophthalmous mou kai katanoēsō ta thaumasia ek tou nomou sou ; i tou de boōntos; i O nomos pneumatikos esti, i dynatai diablepsai hōs axia Theou estin -- apokekrymmena en toutois mathēmata. Anthrōpos ex hymōn, ean prosagagę̄ dōra tǭ Kyriǭ.. Tetērēkamen de pollachou tōn Graphōn ta men dōra epitōn zōōn legesthai, tas de thysias epi tōn apsychōn kata to en tę̄ Genesei legomenon o ‹ Kai epeiden ho Theos epi Habel, kai epi tois dōrois autou, epi de Kaïn kai epi tais thysiais hautou ou proseschen. i Eti de kai touto rhēteon, epi men tōn emo psychōn ;i Anthrōpos, phēsin, exymōn, ean prosagagę̄ dōra o i epi de tōn apsychōn, ‹ ean psychē. i To apsychon hē psychē ; ina tou men alogou to logikon monon kataleipētai, kai tou apsychou hypo tou pyros nenikēmenou apomexnoi to empsychon monon. Procheousi to uiua epi to thysiastērion. Thysiastērion karpōseōs ho bōmos legetai, ephʼ hou thysiai holokautōseōsd thysiastērion de thymiamatos, ty esō thysiastērion. IOu autou. Epeidē echairon tais thysiais hoi Ioudaioi en Aigyptǭ tautais prosethisantes, hōs kaiē en tę̄ erēmǭ moschopoiia martyrei, epetrepsen o Theos tautas autǭ prosagagein, tautę̄ chalinōsas tēs polytheïas tas ataktous hormas kai tou mē thyein diiek masi.
[Lev 1:1] “And he called Moses.” The book is named Leviticus because what concerns the priesthood and the sacrifices, and all such things as God commanded, is contained in this Leviticus. Exodus too contains God's legislation; but how the priests were consecrated by anointing, and how the tabernacle was set up and fitted together, and many other things, Leviticus narrates. If it contains some other things as well, that is not surprising; for the title, Leviticus, indicates what is most important in it. [Of the same.] Those who do not look rightly into the account of the sacrifices either despise it as a mean legislation with nothing worthy of the Creator, or impiously condemn the Creator himself as legislating mean things. But one who has understood the words of David and of the Apostle, the one saying, “Uncover my eyes, and I will perceive the wonders of your law,” and the other crying out, “The law is spiritual,” can see that the teachings hidden in these things are worthy of God. [Lev 1:2] “Any man of you, if he brings gifts to the Lord.” We have observed in many places of the Scriptures that “gifts” is used of living creatures and “sacrifices” of things without life, as is said in Genesis: “And God looked upon Abel and upon his gifts, but to Cain and his sacrifices he paid no attention.” This too must be said, that of living offerings it says, “Any man of you, if he brings gifts,” but of lifeless ones, “if a soul.” In the lifeless offering the soul is named, so that of the irrational only the rational is left, and of the lifeless, overcome by the fire, only the living remains. [Lev 1:5] “They shall pour the blood upon the altar.” The altar of burnt offering is the one on which the whole burnt sacrifices are offered; the altar of incense is the inner altar. [Of the same.] Since the Jews delighted in sacrifices, having become accustomed to them in Egypt, as the making of the calf in the desert also testifies, God permitted them to offer these to himself, curbing in this way the disorderly impulses of polytheism and keeping them from sacrificing to demons.
Chapter 397
397PG 12:398a–398d
Ἐὰν δὲ ψυχὴ μία ἁμάρτῃ ἀκουσίως. ’Ᾱκούσιόν ἐστιν ὅπερ ἄν τις ποιῇ κακόν. Σημειωτέον ὅτι τὸ άγνόημα τὸ ἀκούσιον, ἁμαρτίαν κικὶεί ἡ Γραφή. Καὶ ἄλλων τινῶν μέμνηται ό μακάριος Παῦλος φάσκων· Σκιὰν γὰρ εἶχεν ό νόμος τῶν μελλόντων. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. ι Ψυχὴ ἐὰν ἀμάρτῇ ἀκουσίως, φησι, καὶ μὴ ποιήσῃ ἀπὸ πασῶν τῶν ἐντολῶν Κυρίου, ι κατὰ φύσιν ἔχει. Ἐστι γάρ τάχα τινὰ καὶ προστάγματα Κυρίου, ἀ οὑ δεῖ ποιεῖν κατά τό· ι Ἐδωκα αὐτοῖς προστάγματα οὐ καλά. ι Ψυχὴ οὖν ἁμαρτάνει ἀκουσίως, ὅτε προφάσει εὐσεβείας τὸ μὴ δέον τηρεῖ. Kal. δεῖται θυσίας πρὸς ἄφεσιν· οὐ δεομένου θυσίας τοῦ δρῶντος ἐξεπίτηδες· ὡς ὀ γεγονὼς Ἰουδαῖος ἵνα Ἰουδαίους κερδήσῃ, καὶ περιτεμὼν τὸν Τιμόθεον. Ἦ ψυχὴ ἐκείνη ἣτις ἐὰν ἅψηται παντὸς πράε γματος ἀκαθάρτου, ἢ θνησιμαίου. Θνησιμαῖον δέ φησι τὸν ἀποθανόντα τῷ Θεῷ ἄνθρωπον, ᾧ χρὴ μηδὲ συνεσθίειν· ὁ γὰρ ἁπτόμενος αὑτοῦ ἀκάθαρτος ἐστι. Καὶ τοῦτο ἀκάθαρτον ἐστι τὸ θηρευθέν ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀν τιδίκου ἡμῶν διαβόλου. Κτήνη ἀκάθαρτα εἴη ἂν, οί προσελθόντες μὲν τῷ λόγῳ κτηνώδεις, πρὸς θάνατον δὲ ἁμαρτήσαντες, καὶ μὴ γενόμενοι ἄξιοι σωθῆναι κᾶν μετὰ κτηνῶν, κατὰ τὸ λέγον ῥητόν· ι Ἀνθρὼπους καὶ κτήνη σώσεις, Κύριε. ι Πᾶς ὃς ἐὰν ἅψηται αὐτῶν ἀπωσθιὶσεται. Τινὲς, τὸ ι ἁγιασθήσεται, ι μολυνθήσεται, φασιν, οὐ διὰ τὴν θυσίαν, οἶμαι, ἀλλά διὰ τὸ τολμηρὸν αὐτοῦ amoμένου. Ἀγγαῖος γάρ φησινʼ ι ’ος ἂν ἅψηται, μιαν· θήσεται. ι Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Λέγομεν ὡς διατροφῆς ἀφορμὴ μᾶλλον τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν ἦσαν al θυσίαι καὶ σκιὰ τῆς εὖ· σεβείας. Διπλοῦν δέ ἐστι τὸ κέρδος τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ θύεινʼ καὶ ὅτι Θεῷ προσάγεται τιμὴ, καὶ ὅτι ἃ θύει τις οὐκ ἂν προσκυνήσειεν, οὒδέ ἂν οἰηθείη Θεὸν εἶναι. Kal οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνητε. Θάνατον-ὁ λόγος ἔοικεν ἀπειλεῖν ἱερεῦσιν, οἶνον καὶ σίκερα πίνουσιν, ἡνίκα ἂν εἰς τὴν σκηνὴν εἰσπορεύωνται. Δεῖ γὰρ τοὺς ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ εὐχομένους ἐπισκόπους ἀποστρέφεσθαι ἀπὸ μέθης, οὐ μόνον τῆς ἀπὺ οἴνου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς τῶν πραγμάτων, καὶ διαλογισμῶν ἀνθρωπίνων. Οὐχ ὡς ἄτοπον δὲ ἀπαγορεύει τοῦτο, ἀλλʼ ὅτι ᾔδει τὸ ἀκραιὲς τῶν Ἰσραηλιτῶν, ὅτι ὁπόταν ἅψοιντο, εἰς ἁμετρίαν ἐχώρουν. Ἵνʼ ὅτε είς τὰ ἆγισ. εἰσπορεύονται, νηφάλιον τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀκριβὲς ἔχωσι, καὶ λεπτὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ μνημόσυνον. Διὰ τί οὐκ ἐφάγετε τὸ περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ἐν τόπῳ ἁγίῳ; Δείκνυσι δὲ ὅτι μὴ τῶν ἱερέων ἐσθιόντων, ἀτέλεστοςή θυσία, καὶὴ ἁμαρτία μένει· ἐχρῆν γὰρ καὶ ἐκ τοῦ αἵματος εἰσενεχθῆναι, καὶ αὐτοὺς φαγεῖν. El σήμερον προσαγηόχασι τὰ περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν. Ἐπεὶ συνέβη, φησι, τοῖς περ) Ναδάὗ καὶ Ἀὗιοὺδ προσκρούσασι τῷ Θεῷ ἀποθανεῖν, ὅτε
Ean de psychē mia hamartę̄ akousiōs. ’Akousion estin hoper an tis poię̄ kakon. Sēmeiōteon hoti to agnoēma to akousion, hamartian kikiei hē Graphē. Kai allōn tinōn memnētai o makarios Paulos phaskōn; Skian gar eichen o nomos tōn mellontōn. Tou hautou. i Psychē ean amartę̄ akousiōs, phēsi, kai mē poiēsę̄ apo pasōn tōn entolōn Kyriou, i kata physin echei. Esti gar tacha tina kai prostagmata Kyriou, a hou dei poiein kata to; i Edōka autois prostagmata ou kala. i Psychē oun hamartanei akousiōs, hote prophasei eusebeias to mē deon tērei. Kal. deitai thysias pros aphesin; ou deomenou thysias tou drōntos exepitēdes; hōs o gegonōs Ioudaios hina Ioudaious kerdēsę̄, kai peritemōn ton Timotheon. Ē psychē ekeinē hētis ean hapsētai pantos prae gmatos akathartou, ē thnēsimaiou. Thnēsimaion de phēsi ton apothanonta tǭ Theǭ anthrōpon, hǭ chrē mēde synesthiein; ho gar haptomenos hautou akathartos esti. Kai touto akatharton esti to thēreuthen hypo tou an tidikou hēmōn diabolou. Ktēnē akatharta eiē an, oi proselthontes men tǭ logǭ ktēnōdeis, pros thanaton de hamartēsantes, kai mē genomenoi axioi sōthēnai kan meta ktēnōn, kata to legon rhēton; i Anthrōpous kai ktēnē sōseis, Kyrie. i Pas hos ean hapsētai autōn apōsthiisetai. Tines, to i hagiasthēsetai, i molynthēsetai, phasin, ou dia tēn thysian, oimai, alla dia to tolmēron autou amomenou. Angaios gar phēsinʼ i ’os an hapsētai, mian; thēsetai. i Tou autou. Legomen hōs diatrophēs aphormē mallon tois hiereusin ēsan al thysiai kai skia tēs eu; sebeias. Diploun de esti to kerdos to apo tou thyeinʼ kai hoti Theǭ prosagetai timē, kai hoti ha thyei tis ouk an proskynēseien, oude an oiētheiē Theon einai. Kal ou mē apothanēte. Thanaton-ho logos eoiken apeilein hiereusin, oinon kai sikera pinousin, hēnika an eis tēn skēnēn eisporeuōntai. Dei gar tous hyper tou laou euchomenous episkopous apostrephesthai apo methēs, ou monon tēs apy oinou, alla kai tēs tōn pragmatōn, kai dialogismōn anthrōpinōn. Ouch hōs atopon de apagoreuei touto, allʼ hoti ę̄dei to akraies tōn Israēlitōn, hoti hopotan hapsointo, eis hametrian echōroun. Hinʼ hote eis ta agis. eisporeuontai, nēphalion to tēs psychēs akribes echōsi, kai lepton tou Theou mnēmosynon. Dia ti ouk ephagete to peri tēs hamartias en topǭ hagiǭ? Deiknysi de hoti mē tōn hiereōn esthiontōn, atelestosē thysia, kaiē hamartia menei; echrēn gar kai ek tou haimatos eisenechthēnai, kai autous phagein. El sēmeron prosagēochasi ta peri tēs hamartias autōn. Epei synebē, phēsi, tois per) Nadau kai Hauioud proskrousasi tǭ Theǭ apothanein, hote
[Lev 4:2] “And if one soul sins unwillingly.” Unwilling is whatever evil one does … It should be noted that Scripture calls unwilling ignorance sin. The blessed Paul also mentions some other things, saying, “For the law had a shadow of the things to come.” [Of the same.] “If a soul sins unwillingly,” it says, “and does anything of all the commandments of the Lord”: this makes good sense. For there are perhaps also some ordinances of the Lord which one ought not to do, according to “I gave them ordinances that were not good.” A soul, then, sins unwillingly when, under pretext of piety, it keeps what it ought not; and it needs a sacrifice for forgiveness. The one who acts so deliberately does not need a sacrifice, like the man who became a Jew to win Jews and circumcised Timothy. [Lev 5:2] “That soul which touches any unclean thing, or a carcass.” By “carcass” he means the man who is dead to God, with whom one must not even eat; for whoever touches him is unclean. And this is unclean: what has been caught by our adversary the devil. Unclean cattle would be those who came to the word in a beastly way, but sinned unto death and did not become worthy to be saved even with the cattle, according to the text that says, “Men and cattle you will save, Lord.” [Lev 6:27] “Whoever touches them shall be sanctified.” Some take “shall be sanctified” to mean “shall be defiled”; not because of the sacrifice, I think, but because of the boldness of the one who touches. For Haggai says, “Whoever touches will be defiled.” [Of the same.] We say that the sacrifices were rather a means of maintenance for the priests and a shadow of piety. And the gain from sacrificing is twofold: honour is offered to God, and one would not worship what one sacrifices, nor think it a god. [Lev 10:9] “And you shall not die.” The word seems to threaten death to priests who drink wine and strong drink when they enter the tabernacle. For the bishops who pray for the people must turn away from drunkenness, not only from wine, but also from that of affairs and of human reasonings. He does not forbid this as absurd in itself, but because he knew the intemperance of the Israelites, that whenever they touched wine they went to excess; so that when they enter the holy places they may keep the soul's precision sober and a clear remembrance of God. [Lev 10:17] “Why did you not eat the sin offering in a holy place?” He shows that if the priests do not eat, the sacrifice is incomplete and the sin remains; for some of the blood should have been brought in, and they themselves should have eaten. [Lev 10:19] “If today they have offered their sin offerings.” Since it happened, he says, that Nadab and Abihu offended God and died, when
Chapter 399
399PG 12:399a–399d
καιρὸς ἦν φαγεῖν αὐτοὺς τὸ περὶ ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ τοῦ ἀφεθῆναι ἃ. ἥμαρτε, πῶς οἱ ὲν ἁμαρτίαις ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἐλεγχθέντες διὰ τοῦ φαγεῖν τὴν ἄφεσιν προξενήσομεν; Χρὴ γὰρ τὸν ἱερέα πρότερον περὶ αὑτοῦ ἐξιλάσασθαι. Ταῦτα τὰ κτήνη εἰ φάγεσθε. Θηρία μὲν οῦν οὐ· δαμῶς ἐστι καθαρά· πάντα γὰρ ἀκάθαρτα κατά τὸν εἰπόντα νόμονο ‹ Πᾶν ὃ ἐὰν πορεύηται ἐπὶ χειρῶν αὑτοῦ ὲν πᾶσι τοῖς θηρίοις, ἀκάθαρτα ἔσται ὑμῖν. ι Είη δʼ ἂν γενικῶς θηρία πάντες οἰ ὠμότατοι τῶν ἀνθρώπιον, περί ὠν φησιν ὁ Προφήτης· ι Ἐν τῷ ἐγγίζειν ἐπʼ ἐμὲ κακοῦντας τοῦ φαγεῖν τὰς σάρκας μου ο) καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. Πᾶν κτῆνος δικηλοῦν ὁπλήν. Δικηλῆ τὸν εύσεη σῶς ὲν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ πολιτευόμενον καὶ διὰ τὸν μέλλοντα αἰῶνα ἐπʼ ἐκεῖνον σπεύδοντα· πρὸς δὲ τὸ διχηλεῖν καὶ ὀνυχιστῆρας ὀνυχίζειν περιαιρούμενον τὰ περιττὰ καὶ νεκρὰ, ἀπὸ τῶν χειρῶν, τοῦτʼ ἐστι πράξεων καὶ ποδῶν, τουτέστι τῆς πορείας. Πρὸς τούτοις καὶ ἀνὰ μηρμυκισμὸν οὐκ ἀποτιθέμενον μόνον τὴν πνευματικὴν τροφὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀναμιμνησκόμεφ νον καὶ συνεχῶς αὐτὴν μελετῶντα. Οὗτος ό νόμος περί τῶν κτηνῶν καὶ τῶν πετεινῶν καὶ πάσης ψυχῆς. Πολῦν ποιεῖται λόγον περὶ καθαροῦ καὶ ἀκαθάρτου· πρῶτον ἁγίαν εἷναι τὴν ψυχὴν ὲκπαιδεύει. Εἰ γὰρ τὸ φυσικὸν τοιοῦτον οἷον ὲκ προστᾲγματος Θεοῦ γέγονεν, ἀκάθαρτον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ ἀπὸ μοχθηρᾶς προαιρέσεως, καὶ οὐκ ὲκ προστάγματος Θεοῦ γεγονός; Εἰ τὸ οῦ Θεὸς ποιητὴς ἀκάθαρτον εἶναι νομίζοι τις, πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ ἐναντίως ἔχον πρὸς τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ βούλημα, καὶ ποιοῦν ὅπερ ἁπηγόρευσεν ; Ἄνθρῶπφ ἐάν τινι γένηται ἐν δέρματι χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ obsiti. τΑνάγεται ταῦτα ἐπί τινας μώμους τῆς ψυχῆς. Καὶ ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῶν τοῦ σώματος τραυμάτων μετὰ τὴν θεραπείαν ἐσθʼ ὅτε ἴχνος τοῦ πεπονθέναι τοὺς τόπους καταλείπεται ἐν τῇ καλουμένῃ ούλῇ · τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἡ λαβοῦσα τραῦμα ἁμαρτίας ψυχὴ, κᾶν τύχῃ θεραπείας, οἰονεί ούλὴν ἐνίοτε ἔχει καταλειπομένην. Δεῖ δὲ καὶ τὸν τρόπον τοῦ ἀπʼ αὐτῆς καθαρισμοῦ ἢ οὐ καθαρισμοῦ ἐξεπίστασθαι. Ἄνδρί ἣ γυναικί ᾧ ἐὰν γένηται αὐτῷ λέπρας. Παρατηρητέον ἐφʼ ὧν μὲν λέγεται ἀνθρώπων ο ι Ἐάν τινι γένηται ὲν δέρματι χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ* ι ἦ · τι ει ι Α, ι 1' ι ι ι ι ι -. ι ι. ι Ἀνδρὶῆ γυναικί,ᾧ ἐὰν γένηται ὲν αὐτοῖς ἁφὴ λέπραςο ι ἐφʼ ὧν δέ · ο Σὰρξ, ἐὰν γένηται έν τῷ δέρματι αὑτοῦ ἕλκοςοιῆ· ι Σὲιρξ ἐὰν γένηται ἐν τῷ δέρματι αὑτοῦ κατάκαυμα πυρός. ι Ταῦτα δὲ θραῦ μά ἐστιν. Τὰ ἱμάτια αὑτοῦ ἔσται παραλελιψένα. Διὰ τούτων αἰνίττεται μὴ δεῖν συγκρύπτειν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα, καὶ σκεπάζειν αὐτὰ τὸν τὴν ψυχὴν λελεπρωμένον. Ὥσπερ τοῦ παραλελυμένοι) τὰ ἱμάτια οὗ [οὐκ] ἐσκέπασται ἡ ἀσχημοσύνη· οὕτως βούλεται πᾶσιν ἐκκεῖσθαι μὴ γενόμενον τάφον κεκονιαμένον. Τὸ
kairos ēn phagein autous to peri hamartias tou laou tou aphethēnai ha. hēmarte, pōs hoi en hamartiais hēmeis sēmeron elenchthentes dia tou phagein tēn aphesin proxenēsomen? Chrē gar ton hierea proteron peri hautou exilasasthai. Tauta ta ktēnē ei phagesthe. Thēria men oun ou; damōs esti kathara; panta gar akatharta kata ton eiponta nomono ‹ Pan ho ean poreuētai epi cheirōn hautou en pasi tois thēriois, akatharta estai hymin. i Eiē dʼ an genikōs thēria pantes oi ōmotatoi tōn anthrōpion, peri ōn phēsin ho Prophētēs; i En tǭ engizein epʼ eme kakountas tou phagein tas sarkas mou o) kai ta hexēs. Pan ktēnos dikēloun hoplēn. Dikēlē ton euseē sōs en tǭ aiōni toutǭ politeuomenon kai dia ton mellonta aiōna epʼ ekeinon speudonta; pros de to dichēlein kai onychistēras onychizein periairoumenon ta peritta kai nekra, apo tōn cheirōn, toutʼ esti praxeōn kai podōn, toutesti tēs poreias. Pros toutois kai ana mērmykismon ouk apotithemenon monon tēn pneumatikēn trophēn, alla kai anamimnēskomeph non kai synechōs autēn meletōnta. Houtos o nomos peri tōn ktēnōn kai tōn peteinōn kai pasēs psychēs. Polyn poieitai logon peri katharou kai akathartou; prōton hagian heinai tēn psychēn ekpaideuei. Ei gar to physikon toiouton hoion ek prostągmatos Theou gegonen, akatharton, posǭ mallon to apo mochthēras proaireseōs, kai ouk ek prostagmatos Theou gegonos? Ei to ou Theos poiētēs akatharton einai nomizoi tis, posǭ mallon to enantiōs echon pros to tou Theou boulēma, kai poioun hoper hapēgoreusen ? Anthrōpph ean tini genētai en dermati chrōtos autou obsiti. tAnagetai tauta epi tinas mōmous tēs psychēs. Kai hōsper epi tōn tou sōmatos traumatōn meta tēn therapeian esthʼ hote ichnos tou peponthenai tous topous kataleipetai en tę̄ kaloumenę̄ oulę̄ ; ton auton tropon hē labousa trauma hamartias psychē, kan tychę̄ therapeias, oionei oulēn eniote echei kataleipomenēn. Dei de kai ton tropon tou apʼ autēs katharismou ē ou katharismou exepistasthai. Andri hē gynaiki hǭ ean genētai autǭ lepras. Paratērēteon ephʼ hōn men legetai anthrōpōn o i Ean tini genētai en dermati chrōtos autou* i ē ; ti ei i A, i 1' i i i i i -. i i. i Andriē gynaiki,hǭ ean genētai en autois haphē lepraso i ephʼ hōn de ; o Sarx, ean genētai en tǭ dermati hautou helkosoiē; i Seirx ean genētai en tǭ dermati hautou katakauma pyros. i Tauta de thrau ma estin. Ta himatia hautou estai paralelipsena. Dia toutōn ainittetai mē dein synkryptein ta hamartēmata, kai skepazein auta ton tēn psychēn leleprōmenon. Hōsper tou paralelymenoi) ta himatia hou [ouk] eskepastai hē aschēmosynē; houtōs bouletai pasin ekkeisthai mē genomenon taphon kekoniamenon. To
it was time for them to eat the sin offering of the people, that what the people had sinned might be forgiven, how shall we, who have today been convicted of being in sins, procure forgiveness by eating? For the priest must first make atonement for himself. [Lev 11:2] “These are the animals which you shall eat.” Wild beasts are in no way clean; for all are unclean according to the law that says, “Everything that goes on its paws among all the wild beasts shall be unclean to you.” In general, the wild beasts would be all the most savage of men, of whom the prophet says, “When evildoers drew near me to eat my flesh,” and so on. [Lev 11:3] “Every animal that divides the hoof.” He calls dividing the hoof the one who lives piously in this age and, for the sake of the age to come, hastens toward it; and besides dividing the hoof, parting the claws, removing what is superfluous and dead from the hands, that is, from his deeds, and from the feet, that is, from his conduct. Besides these, chewing the cud: not only storing up the spiritual food, but also recalling it and meditating on it continually. [Lev 11:46] “This is the law concerning the animals and the birds and every soul.” He makes much account of clean and unclean, first to train the soul to be holy. For if what is natural, such as came to be by God's command, is unclean, how much more what comes from a wicked choice and not from God's command? If anyone should think unclean that of which God is the maker, how much more what is contrary to God's will and does what he has forbidden? [Lev 13:2] “If anyone has on the skin of his flesh a scar …” These things are referred to certain blemishes of the soul. And just as with wounds of the body, after healing, a trace of the places that suffered sometimes remains, in what is called a scar, in the same way the soul that has received a wound of sin, even if it obtains healing, sometimes has, as it were, a scar remaining. One must also know the manner of its cleansing or non-cleansing. [Lev 13:29] “A man or a woman in whom there is a plague of leprosy.” It should be observed in which cases “men” are spoken of: “If anyone has on the skin of his flesh,” and “A man or a woman in whom there is a plague of leprosy”; and in which “flesh”: “Flesh, if there is in its skin an ulcer,” and “Flesh, if there is in its skin a burn of fire.” These are wounds. [Lev 13:45] “His garments shall be loosened.” By this he hints that the one whose soul is leprous must not hide his sins and cover them. Just as the nakedness of one whose garments are loosened is not covered, so he wishes him to be exposed to all, and not to become a whitewashed tomb. The
Chapter 401
401PG 12:402a–402d
δέ γε περιβεβλῆσθαι τὸ στόμα, ἐστὶ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν παῤ· ρησίαν ἀνοῖξαι τὸ στόμα· τὸ δὲ τῆς παρε μβολῆς ἐξοίχεσθαι, τὸ μηκέτι τοῖς τῶν ἁγίων αὐτὸν συναυλίη ζεσθαι χοροῖς. Καὶ σφάξουσι τὸ ὀρνίθιον τὸ ἓν εʼίς ἀγγεῖον ὀστράκινον. Θύεται τὸ ὀρνίθιον είς ἀγγεῖον ὀστράκινον, προεμδληθέντος είς αὐτὸ ὓδατος ζῶντος, ἵνα γένηται ό καθαρισμὺς ὕδατι καὶ αἵματι, ειπερ ἐξῆλθεν ἀπὸ τῆς πλευρᾶς τοῦ Σωτῆρος. Ξύλον δὲ κέδρινόν φησι τὸ τῆς σωτηρίας ἡμῶν ξύλον. Τὸ δὲ κεκλωσμένον κόκκινον τύπος ἦν τοῦ τιμίου αἵματος, διʼ οὗ καθαίρεται ὁ κόσμος ὅλος. Οἶμαι δὲ τὸν ὕσσωπον, τὴν διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος θερμότητα τὸ δὲ σπαρτίον τὸ κόκκινον τὴν πρὸς σάρκα σύμβασιν τοῦ Λόγου δηλοῦν. Τὴν κεφαλὴν αὑτοῦ καὶ τὸν πώγωνα ξυρηθοὶσεται. Ξυρᾶται τὴν κεφαλὴν, κατὰ τὰ κεφαλαιωδέστερα καὶ ἀρχικώτερα τῶν δογ μάτωψ κατὰ δὲ τὸν πώγωνα, ὅπερ σύμβολόν ἐστι τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, ἀποτιθέμενος τὰ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἁμαρτήματα · κατὰ δὲ τὰς ὀφρῦς, πᾶσαν οἴησιν, καὶ ἵνʼ οὕτως ὀνομάσω, όφρύωσιν ἀποτιθέμενος. Σύμβολον δέ φησι ταῦτα προσφύντα καὶ ὲξανθήσαντα τῇ ψυχῇ, νεκρότητος τρίχες ὀνομαζόμενοι. Λήψεται δύο ὀμνοὺς ἀμώμους ἑνιαινσιαιόινς. Et; τρία ὁ λόγος διαιρεῖ τὰ ἀναφερόμενα· ἓν μὲν τὴν λύσιν τῶν προημαρτημένων· ἓν δὲ, τὸ ὅλον ἀναφέρεσθαι τῷ Θεῷ· ἕτερον δὲ, τὸ ἀναφερόμενον ἐπʼ αὐτὸν τὸν καθαριζόμενον τῶν ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ γινομένων. Τάχα δὲ καὶ τὰ τρία τῆς σεμιδάλεως δέκατα παραλαμβἀνεται, ἶνʼ ἓν μὲν τῶν δεκάτων τῷ σφαζομένῳ ἀμνῷ συναχθῇ, καὶ τὺ δεύτερον τῷ λοιπῷ, καὶ τὸ τρίτον τῷ προβάτῳ. Ἤδη τοίνυν ἐπὶ τῷ πέμπτῳ καθαρισμῷ ἔχει οὑχί ἄλευρον, ἀλλὰ σεμίδαλιν, ὅπερ σύμβολόν ἐστιν ὕλης ἄρτου καθαροῦ, καὶ ταύτην ἐλαίῳ πεφυραμένην· ὅπερ ὡς τρέφον φῶς, φωτὸς χρείαν καὶ οὐ πυρὺς ἐπιτελοῦν παραλαμβάνεται. Ἔχει δὲ καθʼ ἑαυτὸ χωρὶς τοῦ είς φύρασιν τῆς σεμιδάλεως παραλαμβανομένου ἐλαίου, ἔλαιον δ διὰ τοῦ ἱερέως ἁναφέρεται μέτρου κοτύλης τυγχάνον. Καὶ πάνυ δοκεῖ μοι ἱερέως δέεσθαι τό · ι Στήσει ὁ ἱερεὺς ὁ καθαρίζων τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν καθαριξόμενον, καὶ ταῦτα ἔναντι Κυρίου. ι Καὶ ἥξει τίνος αὐτοῦ ἡ οἰκία, καὶ ἀναγγελεῖ τῷ ἱερεῖ. Καὶ οὐδέποτέ φαμεν κατηγορήσοντα τῆς οἰκίας τῆς ἑαυτοῦ δεῖν ἰέναι τινὰ πρὸς τὸν ἱερέα, τὸν νομοθέτην εἰπεῖν· ἀλλʼ ὥσπερ δὴ μᾶλλον ἐξ ἰατροῦ τῷ συμβεβηκότι φάρμακον ὲξαιτήσοντα. Λελεπρῶσθαι δὴ οὖν φαμεν τὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων συναγωγήν. Τὸ -δὲ τοῦ ἁναγγέλλοντός ἐστι πρόσωπον, ὁ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν χορός οἳ καὶ ἐξαγγέλλονται τῷ μεγάλῳ ἀρχιερεῖ, τουτέστι πρὸ τῆς ἀγανακτήσεως, τῆς dirae ι νοίας τῶν Ἰουδαίων τὰ πάθη, οὐ μίσει, οὐδὲ ᾁπεχ θείᾳ, ἀλλʼ αἰδοῖ τῇ περὶ τὸν εὐεργέτην συνομολογοῦντες μὲν τὰ ἐκείνων πλημμελήματα, ἐλεεῖσθαι δʼ οὖν ὅμως παρακαλοῦντες,
de ge peribeblēsthai to stoma, esti to mē echein par; rēsian anoixai to stoma; to de tēs pare mbolēs exoichesthai, to mēketi tois tōn hagiōn auton synauliē zesthai chorois. Kai sphaxousi to ornithion to hen eʼis angeion ostrakinon. Thyetai to ornithion eis angeion ostrakinon, proemdlēthentos eis auto hydatos zōntos, hina genētai o katharismys hydati kai haimati, eiper exēlthen apo tēs pleuras tou Sōtēros. Xylon de kedrinon phēsi to tēs sōtērias hēmōn xylon. To de keklōsmenon kokkinon typos ēn tou timiou haimatos, diʼ hou kathairetai ho kosmos holos. Oimai de ton hyssōpon, tēn dia tou pneumatos thermotēta to de spartion to kokkinon tēn pros sarka symbasin tou Logou dēloun. Tēn kephalēn hautou kai ton pōgōna xyrēthoisetai. Xyratai tēn kephalēn, kata ta kephalaiōdestera kai archikōtera tōn dog matōps kata de ton pōgōna, hoper symbolon esti tou andros, apotithemenos ta tou andros hamartēmata ; kata de tas ophrys, pasan oiēsin, kai hinʼ houtōs onomasō, ophryōsin apotithemenos. Symbolon de phēsi tauta prosphynta kai exanthēsanta tę̄ psychę̄, nekrotētos triches onomazomenoi. Lēpsetai dyo omnous amōmous heniainsiaioins. Et? tria ho logos diairei ta anapheromena; hen men tēn lysin tōn proēmartēmenōn; hen de, to holon anapheresthai tǭ Theǭ; heteron de, to anapheromenon epʼ auton ton katharizomenon tōn hypʼ autou ginomenōn. Tacha de kai ta tria tēs semidaleōs dekata paralambanetai, inʼ hen men tōn dekatōn tǭ sphazomenǭ amnǭ synachthę̄, kai ty deuteron tǭ loipǭ, kai to triton tǭ probatǭ. Ēdē toinyn epi tǭ pemptǭ katharismǭ echei houchi aleuron, alla semidalin, hoper symbolon estin hylēs artou katharou, kai tautēn elaiǭ pephyramenēn; hoper hōs trephon phōs, phōtos chreian kai ou pyrys epiteloun paralambanetai. Echei de kathʼ heauto chōris tou eis phyrasin tēs semidaleōs paralambanomenou elaiou, elaion d dia tou hiereōs hanapheretai metrou kotylēs tynchanon. Kai pany dokei moi hiereōs deesthai to ; i Stēsei ho hiereus ho katharizōn ton anthrōpon ton katharixomenon, kai tauta enanti Kyriou. i Kai hēxei tinos autou hē oikia, kai anangelei tǭ hierei. Kai oudepote phamen katēgorēsonta tēs oikias tēs heautou dein ienai tina pros ton hierea, ton nomothetēn eipein; allʼ hōsper dē mallon ex iatrou tǭ symbebēkoti pharmakon exaitēsonta. Leleprōsthai dē oun phamen tēn tōn Ioudaiōn synagōgēn. To -de tou hanangellontos esti prosōpon, ho tōn hagiōn prophētōn choros hoi kai exangellontai tǭ megalǭ archierei, toutesti pro tēs aganaktēseōs, tēs dirae i noias tōn Ioudaiōn ta pathē, ou misei, oude hąpech theią, allʼ aidoi tę̄ peri ton euergetēn synomologountes men ta ekeinōn plēmmelēmata, eleeisthai dʼ oun homōs parakalountes,
covering of the mouth is to have no freedom to open the mouth; and departing from the camp, to dwell no longer with the choirs of the saints. [Lev 14:5] “And they shall kill the one bird into an earthen vessel.” The bird is sacrificed into an earthen vessel into which living water has first been put, so that the cleansing may be by water and blood, which indeed came out of the Saviour's side. By the cedar wood he means the wood of our salvation. The spun scarlet was a type of the precious blood by which the whole world is cleansed. I think that the hyssop shows the warmth that comes through the Spirit, and the scarlet thread the Word's union with flesh. [Lev 14:9] “He shall shave his head and his beard.” He shaves his head in respect of the more principal and ruling doctrines; his beard, which is a symbol of the man, by putting off the sins of the man; and his eyebrows, by putting off all conceit and, so to speak, haughtiness. These, he says, are symbols, which have grown on the soul and blossomed there, and are called hairs of deadness. [Lev 14:10] “He shall take two lambs without blemish, a year old.” The word divides the offerings into three: one for the release of earlier sins; one for the whole to be offered up to God; and another offered for the one being cleansed, for what is done by him. Perhaps also the three tenths of fine flour are taken so that one tenth is joined to the slaughtered lamb, the second to the other, and the third to the ewe. At the fifth cleansing, then, he already has not meal but fine flour, which is a symbol of the material of pure bread, and that mixed with oil; which is taken as nourishing light, meeting the need of light and not of fire. And besides the oil taken for mixing the fine flour he has by itself oil which is offered by the priest, a cotyle in measure. And it seems to me that this very much requires a priest: “The priest who cleanses shall set the man being cleansed, and these things, before the Lord.” [Lev 14:35] “And the one whose house it is shall come and report to the priest.” We say that the lawgiver never said one must go to the priest to accuse one's own house, but rather to ask for a remedy, as from a physician, for what has happened. We say, then, that the synagogue of the Jews has become leprous; and the person of the one reporting is the choir of the holy prophets, who report to the great high priest the passions of the Jews' mind, before the indignation, not with hatred nor with enmity, but with reverence toward their benefactor; confessing their offences, yet begging that they may nevertheless be shown mercy,
Chapter 419
419PG 12:419a–419d
Ἐκί τῶν Ὠριγένους εἰς τὸ Λευΐτικόν. -- Ἀπὸ τῆςξεὶς τὸ Λέυϊτικὸν ὁμιλίας δευτέρας, εὐθὺς μετὰ τὴν ἀρχὴν. Μὴ νοήσαντες δὲ διαφορὰν Ἰουδαῖσμοῦ ὁρατοῦ καὶ Ἰουδαῖσμοῦ νοητοῦ, τουτέστιν Ἰουδαῖσμοῦ φανεροῦ καίι Ἰουδαϊσμοῦ τοῦ ἐν κρυπτῷ, οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁθεωτάτων καὶ ἀσεβεστάτων αἱρέσεων, εὐθέως διέστησαν ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἰουδαϊσμοῦ, καὶ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ δόντος ταύτας τὰς Γραφὰς, καὶ ὅλον τὸν νόμον, καὶ ἀνέπλασαν ἕτερον Θεὸν παρὰ τὸν δεδωκότα τὸν νόμον καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, παρὰ τὸν ποιήσαντα οὐρανὸν καὶ γῆν. Τὸ δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει, ἀλλʼ ὁ δεδωκὼς τὸν νόμον, δέδωκε καὶ τὸ Εὐαγγέλιον· ὁ ποιήσας τὰ βλεπόμενα, δέδωκε καὶ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα. Οὕτω δὲ ἔχει συγγένειαν, ὥστε τὰ ἀόρατα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀπὸ κτίσεως κόσμου τοῖς ποιήμασι νοούμενα καθορᾶσθαι. Συγγένειαν ἔχει καὶ τὰ βλεπόμενα τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν προς τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ νοούμενα τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν. Ἐπεὶ οῦν συνέστηκεν ἡ Γραφὴ καὶ αὐτὴ οἱονεὶ ὲκ σώματος μὲν τοῦ βλεπομένου, ψυχῆς δὲ τῆς ἐν αὑτῷ νοουμένης καὶ κατας λαμβανομένης, καὶ πνεύματος τοῦ κατὰ τὰ ὑποδείγματα, καὶ σκιὰν τῶν ἐπουρανίων · φέρε, ἐπικαλεσάμενοι τὸν ποιήσαντα τῇ Γραφῇ σῶμα καὶ ψυχὴν καὶ πνεῦμα, σῶμα μὲν τοῖς πρὸ ἡμῶν, ψυχὴν δὲ ἡμῖν, πνεῦμα δὲ τοῖς ὲν τῷ μέλλοντι αἰῶνι κληρονομήσουσι ζωὴν αἰώνιον, καὶ μέλλουσιν ἥκειν ἐπὶ τὰ ἐπουράο ια, καὶ ἀληθινὰ τοῦ νόμου, ὲρευνήσωμεν οὐ τὸ γράμμα, ἀλλὰ τὴν ψυχὴν ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος. Εἰ δὲ οἷοί τέ ἐσμεν, ἀναβησόμεθα καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ πνεῦμα, κατὰ τὸν λόγον τὸν περ). τῶν ἀναγνωσθεισῶν θυσιῶν.
Eki tōn Ōrigenous eis to Leuïtikon. -- Apo tēsxeis to Leuïtikon homilias deuteras, euthys meta tēn archēn. Mē noēsantes de diaphoran Ioudaismou horatou kai Ioudaismou noētou, toutestin Ioudaismou phanerou kaii Ioudaïsmou tou en kryptǭ, hoi apo tōn hatheōtatōn kai asebestatōn haireseōn, eutheōs diestēsan apo tou Ioudaïsmou, kai tou Theou tou dontos tautas tas Graphas, kai holon ton nomon, kai aneplasan heteron Theon para ton dedōkota ton nomon kai tous prophētas, para ton poiēsanta ouranon kai gēn. To de ouch houtōs echei, allʼ ho dedōkōs ton nomon, dedōke kai to Euangelion; ho poiēsas ta blepomena, dedōke kai ta mē blepomena. Houtō de echei syngeneian, hōste ta aorata tou Theou apo ktiseōs kosmou tois poiēmasi nooumena kathorasthai. Syngeneian echei kai ta blepomena tou nomou kai tōn prophētōn pros ta mē blepomena, alla nooumena tou nomou kai tōn prophētōn. Epei oun synestēken hē Graphē kai autē hoionei ek sōmatos men tou blepomenou, psychēs de tēs en hautǭ nooumenēs kai katas lambanomenēs, kai pneumatos tou kata ta hypodeigmata, kai skian tōn epouraniōn ; phere, epikalesamenoi ton poiēsanta tę̄ Graphę̄ sōma kai psychēn kai pneuma, sōma men tois pro hēmōn, psychēn de hēmin, pneuma de tois en tǭ mellonti aiōni klēronomēsousi zōēn aiōnion, kai mellousin hēkein epi ta epourao ia, kai alēthina tou nomou, ereunēsōmen ou to gramma, alla tēn psychēn epi tou parontos. Ei de hoioi te esmen, anabēsometha kai epi to pneuma, kata ton logon ton per). tōn anagnōstheisōn thysiōn.
[From the works of Origen on Leviticus. From the second homily on Leviticus, right after the beginning.] Not having understood the difference between visible Judaism and intelligible Judaism, that is, between outward Judaism and Judaism in secret, those of the most godless and impious heresies at once separated themselves from Judaism and from the God who gave these Scriptures and the whole law, and fashioned another God besides the one who gave the law and the prophets, besides the maker of heaven and earth. But this is not so: he who gave the law gave also the Gospel; he who made the visible things gave also the invisible. And these are so akin that “the invisible things of God are clearly seen from the creation of the world, being understood by the things that are made.” The visible things of the law and the prophets too are akin to the things of the law and the prophets that are not seen but understood. Since, then, Scripture too consists, as it were, of a body which is seen, of a soul understood and grasped within it, and of a spirit according to the patterns and shadow of the heavenly things, come, let us call upon him who made for Scripture body and soul and spirit (the body for those before us, the soul for us, and the spirit for those who in the age to come will inherit eternal life and will come to the heavenly and true things of the law), and let us search for the present not the letter but the soul. And if we are able, we shall ascend also to the spirit, in the account of the sacrifices that have been read.
Chapter 573
573PG 12:574a–574d
Οὐδὲν πλὴν εὶς τὸ μάννα οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἡμῖν. Μᾶν ὠνομάσθη ἀπὸ τοῦ τοὺς Ἑβραίους πρώτως θέαμα ξένον ὁρῶντας εἰπεῖν πρὸς ἀλλήλους τῇ =3τρίῳ γλώσσῃ, ι Μᾶν, ι τουτέστι, ι Τί τοῦτος ι ὅπερ οὐκ ἂν εἶπον, εἱ ἔθος ἦν, ὣς τινες τῶν ἐθνικῶν φασι, τὴν φύσιν τῶν τόπων ἀπʼ αἰῶνος τὰ τοιαῦτα φέρειν. Καὶ νῦν δὲ εί καταβαίνει μνήμης ἓνεκα μικρῦν τι. Καὶ οὐκέτι προσέθεντο. Λείπει, ‹ τοῦ πραεῖα τεύειν. ι Οὐκέτι, φησὶ, προεφήτευσαν. Εἰς ἅπαξ γὰρ προφητεύουσιν, ἵνα μὴ ὲξισωθῶσι Μωσεῖο ἀλλʼ ὡς γνωσθῆναι ὅτι μετειλήφασι, καὶ πάντες ἃμα προςητεύουσιν. Ἓν γὰρ ὲν Χριστῷ τὸ Πνεῦμα, καὶ μία δά πάντων ἡ ἐνέργεια. Kal ὁ λαὸς οὐκ ἐξῆρεν, ἕως ἐκαθαρίσθη Μαριάμ. Ἔμεινε δὲ ήσκηνὴ ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον εἰς τιμὴν Μαρίας, ἵνα μὴ τοιαύτη οὖσα ἀκολουθῇ. Ἀπόστειλον σεαυτῷ ἄνδρας, καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. Ἀποσταλῆναι κελεύει τινὰς, δεικνὺς ὅτι πλησιάζουσι μὲν τῇ Παλαιστίνῃ, τῆς Αἰγύπτου τὸ τοῖς Ἐὅραίπ ἑτοιμότερον παραστήσας καὶ τὸ ἄπιστον ἐξελέγξας, τάφον μὲν τὴν ἔρημον ἀπονέμει, οἷς 6 νοῦς ἀπέμεινε σκληρόςο θάνατος γὰρ ἀσεβῶν, τῆς ἐν τῷ ζῇν πλᾶνης αἱρετώτερος. Ἰησοῦν. Ἐπισημαντέον ὅτι 6 τοῦ Navi; υἱὸς τύπος γέγονε τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς τὸν οἴκτιστον λαὸν πλανώμενον ἐλευθερώσας, είς οὐρανὸν ἀνήγαγεν· οὐκ εἰς γῆν ἐσθίουσαν τοὺς ἐνοικούντας. Ἠ μὴν οὐκ ὄψονται τὴν γῆν, ἦν ὤμοσα rei; πατράσιν αὐτῶν. Παρατηρητέον ὅτι τῶν ἐκ τῆς γῆς Αἰγύπτου ἐξελθόντων εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὴν γῆν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τινες · οὐδὲ γὰρ 6 Θεὸς τοῦτο ἀπηγόρευσεν· ἀλλὰ μόνους τοὺς εἰκοποέτεις καὶ ἐπάνω τῶν ἐξελθόντων ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου μοσχοποιήσαντας ἀνεῖλεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ ο φειδόμενος συγγενοῦς τῆς νεότητος αὐτοῖς, οἷς 6 τῆς ζωῆς χρόνος οὔπω είκοστοὲτης ἦν, καὶ πολλῷ μᾶλλον τοῖς βρέφεσι, καὶ παιδίοις, ἕως τῆς ἐφήβου ἡλικίας.
Ouden plēn eis to manna hoi ophthalmoi hēmin. Man ōnomasthē apo tou tous Hebraious prōtōs theama xenon horōntas eipein pros allēlous tę̄ =3triǭ glōssę̄, i Man, i toutesti, i Ti toutos i hoper ouk an eipon, hei ethos ēn, hōs tines tōn ethnikōn phasi, tēn physin tōn topōn apʼ aiōnos ta toiauta pherein. Kai nyn de ei katabainei mnēmēs heneka mikryn ti. Kai ouketi prosethento. Leipei, ‹ tou praeia teuein. i Ouketi, phēsi, proephēteusan. Eis hapax gar prophēteuousin, hina mē exisōthōsi Mōseio allʼ hōs gnōsthēnai hoti meteilēphasi, kai pantes hama prosēteuousin. Hen gar en Christǭ to Pneuma, kai mia da pantōn hē energeia. Kal ho laos ouk exēren, heōs ekatharisthē Mariam. Emeine de ēskēnē hepta hēmeras epi ton topon eis timēn Marias, hina mē toiautē ousa akolouthę̄. Aposteilon seautǭ andras, kai ta hexēs. Apostalēnai keleuei tinas, deiknys hoti plēsiazousi men tę̄ Palaistinę̄, tēs Aigyptou to tois Heoraip hetoimoteron parastēsas kai to apiston exelenxas, taphon men tēn erēmon aponemei, hois 6 nous apemeine sklēroso thanatos gar asebōn, tēs en tǭ zę̄n planēs hairetōteros. Iēsoun. Episēmanteon hoti 6 tou Navi? huios typos gegone tou Christou, hos ton oiktiston laon planōmenon eleutherōsas, eis ouranon anēgagen; ouk eis gēn esthiousan tous enoikountas. Ē mēn ouk opsontai tēn gēn, ēn ōmosa rei? patrasin autōn. Paratērēteon hoti tōn ek tēs gēs Aigyptou exelthontōn eisēlthon eis tēn gēn tēs epangelias tines ; oude gar 6 Theos touto apēgoreusen; alla monous tous eikopoeteis kai epanō tōn exelthontōn ek gēs Aigyptou moschopoiēsantas aneilen en tę̄ erēmǭ o pheidomenos syngenous tēs neotētos autois, hois 6 tēs zōēs chronos oupō eikostoetēs ēn, kai pollǭ mallon tois brephesi, kai paidiois, heōs tēs ephēbou hēlikias.
[Num 11:6] “Our eyes are on nothing but the manna.” It was named “man” because the Hebrews, on first seeing the strange sight, said to one another in their native tongue, “Man?”, that is, “What is this?” They would not have said this if it had been usual, as some of the Gentiles say, for the nature of those places to produce such things from of old. And even now, if any falls, it is a little, for remembrance's sake. [Num 11:25] “And they did not continue.” “To prophesy” is missing: they no longer prophesied, it says. For they prophesy once only, so as not to be made equal to Moses; but so that it may be known that they had received a share, all prophesy together. For the Spirit in Christ is one, and the working of all is one. [Num 12:15] “And the people did not set out until Miriam was cleansed.” The tabernacle remained seven days in that place in honour of Miriam, so that she should not follow while in such a state. [Num 13:2] “Send for yourself men,” and so on. He commands some to be sent, showing that they are near Palestine; having set before the Hebrews what was readier than Egypt, and having exposed their unbelief, he assigns the desert as a tomb to those whose mind remained hard; for the death of the impious is preferable to their wandering in life. [Num 13:16] “Joshua.” It should be noted that the son of Nun became a type of Christ, who freed the most pitiable people from its wandering and led it up into heaven, not into a land that devours its inhabitants. [Num 14:23] “Surely they shall not see the land which I swore to their fathers.” It should be observed that some of those who came out of the land of Egypt entered the land of promise, for God did not forbid this; but he destroyed in the desert only those twenty years old and upward of those who came out of the land of Egypt, who had made the calf; sparing the youth akin to them, those whose lifetime was not yet twenty years, and much more the infants and children up to the age of puberty.
Chapter 575
575PG 12:575a–575d
Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Τοῦτο τύπος τῆς ἀληθείας. ι Ἐὰν γὰρ μὴ στραφῆτε καὶ γένησθε ὡς τά παιδία, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθητε είς τὴν βασιλείαν. ι Ἁνέλεσθε τὰ πυρεῖα τὰ χαλκᾶ. ’Ὠσπερ ὁ χαλκοῦς ὄφις σημεῖον τῆς ἀπιστίας αὐτῶν, οὕτω καὶ τὰ πυρεῖα τῶν περὶ Κορὲ καὶ Δαθὰν καὶ Ἀβειρὼν περίθεμα ὅντα τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ. Καὶ τοῖς υἱοῖς Λευῒ ἰδοὺ δέδωκα πᾶν ἐπιδέκατον ἐν Ἰσραήλ. Εἰκότως ἀπονενὲμηνται τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν αἱ ἀπαρχαὶ, ἐπείπερ οὐ κληρονομεῖ ἠ Λευῒ φυλὴ, οὐδὲ κλῆρον λαμβάνει ὡς αἱ λοιπαί. Τοῦτο πρόξενον τῆς ἀκτημοσύνης τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν ὁ κλῆρος τοῦ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συμμερίζεσθαι. Δεκάτας ἐδίδου ό λαὸς τοῖς Λευίταις, καὶ οί Λευῖται τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν. Μὴ ἐκ τῆς πέτρας ταύτης ἐξάξομεν ὑμῖν fidem; Ὀ Μωῦσῆςΐμὴ δοξάσας adeas; é'rci τοῦ λαοῦ, sxa); λύθη παρελθεῖν μετʼ αὐτοῦ. Ἵνα γὰρ μὴ ὃν ἐτίμων ζῶντα, ἐν Θεοῦ θεραπείαις τιμήσωσιν ἀπελθόντα, ἀφανῆ τὸν τόπον [ἵσ.’τάφον] πεποίηκεν. Νῦν ἐκλειξει ἠ συναγωγὴ αὕτη πάντας τοὺς κύκλῳ ἡμῶν. Τοῦτο παράδειγμα ἐλαβεν · ὥσπερ ὁ μόσχος ἐν τῷ στόματι τὰ χλωρὰ, οὕτω καὶ ὁ ἅγιος λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσι στρατευόμενος ὲν τοῖς στόμασιν ἔχει τὰ ὅπλα διὰ τῶν εὐχῶν. Καὶ τοῦτο εἰδὼς ό Βαλὰκ ἐν τοῖς προτέροις πολέμοις ἐναργῶς γινόμενον, βούλεται καὶ αὐτὸς τοῖς διὰ χειλέων ὅπλοις στρατεύεσθαι· καὶ καλεῖ τὸν Βαλαὰμ τὸν ἔχοντα τὰ ὅπλα τῆς ἐναντίας δυνάμεως ἐν τοῖς χείλεσι τὰς ἀράς. Ol γὰρ ἆγιοι ἄγγελοι συμπράττουσι τοῖς δικαίοις είς τὰ σωτήρια, καὶ ἀγαθά ἔργα, καὶ οἱ πονηροὶ δαίμονες τοῖς ἀσεβέσιν ἁμαρτωλοῖς ἀνθρώποις είς τὰ πονηρά καὶ βλαβερὰ τῆς σωτηρίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἔργα. Οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἅγιοι στρατεύονται λόγοις εὐχῶν, οἱ δὲ ἀσεβεῖς καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ λόγοις μαγειῶν. Tot? αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἡ κατʼ αἴσθησιν τῶν πραγμάτων ἱστορία μεγάλης ὡφελείας πεπλήρωται. Ἐκ δὲ τῆς προκειμένης ἱστορίας μανθάνομεν πολλὰ, καὶ ὅτι ἔστι στρατεύεσθαι λόγοις, καὶ μεγάλα πράγματα οἰκονομεῖσθαι, καὶ κατορθοῦσθαι διὰ λόγωνσ καὶ οἱ μὲν ἇγιοι στρατεύονται λόγοις εὐχῶν οἱ δὲ ἀσεβεῖς λόγοις μαγειῶν. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ἦ ἐναντία δύναμις οὐδέποτε ποιεῖ ἔργον καλὸν, ἀλλά πάντα χείριστα ἐνεργεῖ καὶ ὅπερ ἐνεργήσει κακὸν, οὐ δύναται ἀποκαταστῆσαι εἰς βέλτιον, οὐ γὰρ ἔχει τάξιν τοῦ κρείττονος. Τῇ δὲ κρείττονι δυνάμει πάντα δυνατά. 'U γὰρ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἀλγεῖν ποιεῖ, καὶ πάλιν ἀποκαθίστησιν, ἐνεργῆσαι δὲ κακὸν οὐκ ἕχει · οὐ γὰρ καθʼ ἕξιν μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατʼ οὐσίαν ἀγαθός ἐστιν. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ἐν τοῖς ἀνθρωπίνοις ἐστί τινα καὶ μαντεῖα τετελεσμένα, καὶ θυσίαι, καί τινα δῶρα προσφερόμενα τοῖς δαίμοσιν· ὥστε διὰ τούτων προσφερομένων μαντεύεσθαι τοὺς βουλομένους. Μαντεία.δέ ἐστιν ἕκαστον πρᾶγμα. Ού γὰρ ἀληθὴς πρόρρησις. ἦλθεν ό Κύριος πρὸς αὐτόθʼ. Κατὰ ἀλήθειαν
Tou autou. Touto typos tēs alētheias. i Ean gar mē straphēte kai genēsthe hōs ta paidia, ou mē eiselthēte eis tēn basileian. i Hanelesthe ta pyreia ta chalka. ’Ōsper ho chalkous ophis sēmeion tēs apistias autōn, houtō kai ta pyreia tōn peri Kore kai Dathan kai Abeirōn perithema honta tǭ thysiastēriǭ. Kai tois huiois Leuï idou dedōka pan epidekaton en Israēl. Eikotōs aponenemēntai tois hiereusin hai aparchai, epeiper ou klēronomei ē Leuï phylē, oude klēron lambanei hōs hai loipai. Touto proxenon tēs aktēmosynēs tois hiereusin ho klēros tou tǭ thysiastēriǭ symmerizesthai. Dekatas edidou o laos tois Leuitais, kai oi Leuitai tois hiereusin. Mē ek tēs petras tautēs exaxomen hymin fidem? O Mōysēsïmē doxasas adeas? e'rci tou laou, sxa)? lythē parelthein metʼ autou. Hina gar mē hon etimōn zōnta, en Theou therapeiais timēsōsin apelthonta, aphanē ton topon [his.’taphon] pepoiēken. Nyn ekleixei ē synagōgē hautē pantas tous kyklǭ hēmōn. Touto paradeigma elaben ; hōsper ho moschos en tǭ stomati ta chlōra, houtō kai ho hagios laos tois cheilesi strateuomenos en tois stomasin echei ta hopla dia tōn euchōn. Kai touto eidōs o Balak en tois proterois polemois enargōs ginomenon, bouletai kai autos tois dia cheileōn hoplois strateuesthai; kai kalei ton Balaam ton echonta ta hopla tēs enantias dynameōs en tois cheilesi tas aras. Ol gar agioi angeloi symprattousi tois dikaiois eis ta sōtēria, kai agatha erga, kai hoi ponēroi daimones tois asebesin hamartōlois anthrōpois eis ta ponēra kai blabera tēs sōtērias tōn anthrōpōn erga. Hoi men gar hagioi strateuontai logois euchōn, hoi de asebeis kai hamartōloi logois mageiōn. Tot? autou. Kai hē katʼ aisthēsin tōn pragmatōn historia megalēs hōpheleias peplērōtai. Ek de tēs prokeimenēs historias manthanomen polla, kai hoti esti strateuesthai logois, kai megala pragmata oikonomeisthai, kai katorthousthai dia logōns kai hoi men hagioi strateuontai logois euchōn hoi de asebeis logois mageiōn. Tou autou. Ē enantia dynamis oudepote poiei ergon kalon, alla panta cheirista energei kai hoper energēsei kakon, ou dynatai apokatastēsai eis beltion, ou gar echei taxin tou kreittonos. Tę̄ de kreittoni dynamei panta dynata. 'U gar Theos hēmōn algein poiei, kai palin apokathistēsin, energēsai de kakon ouk hechei ; ou gar kathʼ hexin monon, alla kai katʼ ousian agathos estin. Tou autou. En tois anthrōpinois esti tina kai manteia tetelesmena, kai thysiai, kai tina dōra prospheromena tois daimosin; hōste dia toutōn prospheromenōn manteuesthai tous boulomenous. Manteia.de estin hekaston pragma. Ou gar alēthēs prorrēsis. ēlthen o Kyrios pros autothʼ. Kata alētheian
[Of the same.] This is a type of the truth: “For unless you turn and become like children, you will not enter the kingdom.” [Num 16:37] “Take up the bronze censers.” Just as the bronze serpent was a sign of their unbelief, so also the censers of Korah, Dathan, and Abiram, which became a covering for the altar. [Num 18:21] “And to the sons of Levi, behold, I have given every tithe in Israel.” Fittingly the first-fruits are assigned to the priests, since the tribe of Levi does not inherit nor take a lot as the others do. This lot, sharing with the altar, procures poverty for the priests. The people gave tithes to the Levites, and the Levites to the priests. [Num 20:10] “Shall we bring water for you out of this rock?” Because Moses did not glorify God before the people, he was prevented from crossing over with them. And so that they should not honour with divine worship after his departure the one whom they had honoured while he lived, God made the place unseen. [Num 22:4] “Now this congregation will lick up all who are around us.” He took this example: as the calf takes the green things into its mouth, so the holy people, waging war with their lips, have their weapons in their mouths through their prayers. And Balak, knowing that this had plainly happened in the earlier wars, wishes himself to make war with the weapons of the lips, and calls Balaam, who had on his lips the weapons of the opposing power, the curses. For the holy angels work together with the righteous toward what saves and toward good works, and the wicked demons with impious and sinful men toward wicked works, harmful to men's salvation. The saints make war with words of prayers, the impious and sinners with words of magic. [Of the same.] Even the history of events according to the senses is full of great benefit. From the present history we learn many things: that it is possible to wage war with words, and to manage and accomplish great things through words; and that the saints make war with words of prayers, the impious with words of magic. [Of the same.] The opposing power never does a good work, but works all that is worst; and the evil it works it cannot restore to the better, for it does not have the rank of the better. But to the better power all things are possible. For our God causes pain and restores again, but he cannot work evil; for he is good not only by disposition but also by essence. [Of the same.] Among human things there are also some divinations performed, and sacrifices, and certain gifts offered to the demons, so that through these offerings those who wish may divine. Each such thing is divination, for it is not true prediction. [Num 22:9] “The Lord came to him.” In truth
Chapter 577
577PG 12:578a–578d
θεία δύναμις παρεγένετο πρὸς Βαλαὰμ ού κληθεῖσα, ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ. Παρεγένετο οὖν, ἵνα ἀποτροπιασμὸν ποιήσῃ τῶν καλουμένων ὑπὸ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ δαιμόνων, καὶ τὰς θείας προρρήσεις οἰκονομήσῃ. Καὶ ἀνέστη ό ἄγγελος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐνδιαβάλλειν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τῆς ὀδοῦ. '0 ἐνδιαβάλλων ὲν τῇ ὁδῷ ἄγγελος τὸν Βαλαὰμ, ἆρα μὴ οὗτός ἐστι περὶ οὗ εἷπεν 6 Θεὸς πρὸς τὸν Μωῦσῆν ὅτι ο Ἀγγελος μου προ-α πορεύεται ἔμπροσθεν ὑμῶν διαφυλάσσων ὑμᾶς ἐν τῇὸδῷ;ι Συμπορεύθητι μετὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων. Οὐκ ἐπέτρεψε τῷ Βαλαὰμ 6 Θεὸς ἀπελθεῖν πρὸς τὸν Βαλάκ· ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀπελθεῖν ἐβούλετο, συγχωρεῖ. Παραγγέλλει δὲ αὐτῷ μόνα τὰ ἀποκαλυπτόμενα εἰπεῖν· καὶ 6 ἄγγελος δὲ φανεὶς καὶ φοβήσας τοῦτο βεβαιοῖ. οικοόόμησόν μοι ἑπτὰ βωμούς. Ἔστι δὲ καὶ διά σώματος ἑτέρω ἔργα γινόμενα, καὶ ὲν τοῖς κρείττοσι καὶ ἑν τοῖς χείροσιν. Οἷσιν ὡς τὰ γινόμενα ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ ὑπὸ Μωῦσῆ καὶ Ἀαρὼν καὶτῶν ὲπαοιδῶν. Ἀλλά συγκρινομένη ἠ θεία δύναμις πρὸς τὴν ἀντικειμένην κατά πρόσωπον τῶν ἁμφὶβαλλόντων, αὕτη ἡ θεία δύναμις νικᾷʼ ὡς ἡ ῥάβδος Μωῦσῆ τάς τῶν ὲπαοιδῶν ῥάβδους κατέπιεν. Τὸῦ αὐτοῦ. Εἰώθει 6 Βαλαὰμ ταῖς αὐταῖς θυσίαις θεραπεύων προσκαλεῖσθαι τοὺς δαίμονας. Τοιαῦται γὰρ αἱ θυσίαι ἐτελοῦντο ὲν κόσμῳ τοῖς δαίμοσι. Διά τοῦτο οῦν 6 Θεὸς θυσίαις ἀπαιτεῖ τὸν πρῶτον λαὸν, ἵνα διὰ τὸ προσφέρεσθαι τῷ Θεῷ, καταργηθῇ τὸ προσφέρεσθαι τοῖς δαίμοσιν· εί καὶ τὰ μάλιστα σύμβολα ἦσαν. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Ἐνανθρωπήσας οὖν 6 Σωτὴρ ἀπέστειλε τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ ἵνα λύσωσι τὴν ὄνον, τουτέστιν ὲκ τῶν δεσμῶν ὧν ἔδησεν ὴ ἀντικειμένη δύναμις, 6 νοητὸς Βαλαάμ καὶ λύσαντες ἤγαγον πρὸς τὸν Ὶησοῦν, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τῇ ὄνῳ τὰ ἱμάτια, τουτέστι τὰς ἀρετὰς τοῦ Εὑαγγελίου · καὶ ἐπικαθίσας αὐτῇ 6 Σωτὴρ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν πόλιν. Kal παρέλαβε Βαλὰκ τὸν Βαλαὰμ ἐπὶ τὴν κοβορὴν τοῦ Φογὼρ. Ὑπελάμβανεν 6 Βαλὰκ μεμετρημένην τὴν τέχνην τοῦ Βαλαὰμ ὲν τοῖς τόποις. Διὸ παρελάμβανεν αὑτὸν εἰς τὴν κορυφὴν τοῦ Φογὼρ, οἰόμενος ἰσχύειν τὸν μάγον ἐκεῖθεν ἀράσασθαι τὸν λαὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὸν Βαλαάμ. Φογὼρ δὲ ἑρμηνεύεται ἡδυσμὸς, ἢστόματος δέρμα, τουτέστιν, ἀκρότης φιληδονίας, καὶ νεκρότης λύγου. ὧν ἐπειρᾶτο ἀράσασθαι τὸν λαὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 6 Βαλαάμ. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Δύο εἰσὶ κορυφαὶ, τουτέστιν ἀκροτάτης (ᾆδʼ)ἀρετῆε, καὶ τῆς κακίας· καὶ 6 μὲν Μωῦσῆς ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον τῆς ἀρετῆς ἀναβέβηκεν, 6 δὲ Βαλαὰμ ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον τῆς κακίας. Οὐκ ἐπορεύθη κατὰ τὸ ειωθὸς αὐτῷ εὶς συνάντησιν τοῖς οἰωνοῖς. Σύμβολον ἐστιν 6 Βαλαὰμ οὗτος τοῦ ὲκ τῶν ἐθνῶν λαοῦ ὅστις ἐπηκολούθει τοῖς ala» νοῖς τὸ πρότερον, γνοὺς δὲ ὅτι ἀκόρεστὸν ἐστι Κυρίῳ, οὐ προσέθετο· ἀλλά μὴν καὶ ἑρμηνεύεται μάταιος
theia dynamis paregeneto pros Balaam ou klētheisa, hypʼ autou. Paregeneto oun, hina apotropiasmon poiēsę̄ tōn kaloumenōn hypo tou Balaam daimonōn, kai tas theias prorrēseis oikonomēsę̄. Kai anestē o angelos tou Theou endiaballein auton epi tēs odou. '0 endiaballōn en tę̄ hodǭ angelos ton Balaam, ara mē houtos esti peri hou heipen 6 Theos pros ton Mōysēn hoti o Angelos mou pro-a poreuetai emprosthen hymōn diaphylassōn hymas en tę̄odǭ?i Symporeuthēti meta tōn anthrōpōn toutōn. Ouk epetrepse tǭ Balaam 6 Theos apelthein pros ton Balak; epeidē de apelthein ebouleto, synchōrei. Parangellei de autǭ mona ta apokalyptomena eipein; kai 6 angelos de phaneis kai phobēsas touto bebaioi. oikooomēson moi hepta bōmous. Esti de kai dia sōmatos heterō erga ginomena, kai en tois kreittosi kai hen tois cheirosin. Hoisin hōs ta ginomena en Aigyptǭ hypo Mōysē kai Aarōn kaitōn epaoidōn. Alla synkrinomenē ē theia dynamis pros tēn antikeimenēn kata prosōpon tōn hamphiballontōn, hautē hē theia dynamis nikąʼ hōs hē rhabdos Mōysē tas tōn epaoidōn rhabdous katepien. Tou autou. Eiōthei 6 Balaam tais autais thysiais therapeuōn proskaleisthai tous daimonas. Toiautai gar hai thysiai etelounto en kosmǭ tois daimosi. Dia touto oun 6 Theos thysiais apaitei ton prōton laon, hina dia to prospheresthai tǭ Theǭ, katargēthę̄ to prospheresthai tois daimosin; ei kai ta malista symbola ēsan. Tou hautou. Enanthrōpēsas oun 6 Sōtēr apesteile tous mathētas autou hina lysōsi tēn onon, toutestin ek tōn desmōn hōn edēsen ē antikeimenē dynamis, 6 noētos Balaam kai lysantes ēgagon pros ton Iēsoun, kai epithentes tę̄ onǭ ta himatia, toutesti tas aretas tou Heuangeliou ; kai epikathisas autę̄ 6 Sōtēr eisēlthen eis tēn hagian polin. Kal parelabe Balak ton Balaam epi tēn koborēn tou Phogōr. Hypelambanen 6 Balak memetrēmenēn tēn technēn tou Balaam en tois topois. Dio parelambanen hauton eis tēn koryphēn tou Phogōr, oiomenos ischyein ton magon ekeithen arasasthai ton laon tou Theou ton Balaam. Phogōr de hermēneuetai hēdysmos, ēstomatos derma, toutestin, akrotēs philēdonias, kai nekrotēs lygou. hōn epeirato arasasthai ton laon tou Theou 6 Balaam. Tou autou. Dyo eisi koryphai, toutestin akrotatēs (ądʼ)aretēe, kai tēs kakias; kai 6 men Mōysēs epi to akron tēs aretēs anabebēken, 6 de Balaam epi to akron tēs kakias. Ouk eporeuthē kata to eiōthos autǭ eis synantēsin tois oiōnois. Symbolon estin 6 Balaam houtos tou ek tōn ethnōn laou hostis epēkolouthei tois ala» nois to proteron, gnous de hoti akoreston esti Kyriǭ, ou prosetheto; alla mēn kai hermēneuetai mataios
a divine power came to Balaam, though not called by him. It came, then, to avert the demons called by Balaam and to manage the divine predictions. [Num 22:22] “And the angel of God rose up to oppose him on the way.” The angel who opposed Balaam on the way: is he perhaps the one of whom God said to Moses, “My angel goes before you, guarding you on the way”? [Num 22:35] “Go with these men.” God did not permit Balaam to go to Balak; but since he wished to go, God allows it. He charges him to say only what is revealed; and the angel, by appearing and frightening him, confirms this. [Num 23:1] “Build me seven altars.” There are also works done through a body other than God's, both among the better and among the worse, such as what was done in Egypt by Moses and Aaron and by the enchanters. But when the divine power is compared with the opposing one in the presence of those in doubt, the divine power wins, as the rod of Moses swallowed the rods of the enchanters. [Of the same.] Balaam used to summon the demons by serving them with these same sacrifices; for such were the sacrifices performed in the world to demons. For this reason God required sacrifices of the first people, so that, by offering to God, offering to demons might be abolished; even though the sacrifices were above all symbols. [Of the same.] The Saviour, then, having become man, sent his disciples to loose the donkey, that is, from the bonds with which the opposing power, the intelligible Balaam, had bound it; and having loosed it they brought it to Jesus and put their garments on the donkey, that is, the virtues of the Gospel; and the Saviour, sitting on it, entered the holy city. [Num 23:28] “And Balak took Balaam to the top of Peor.” Balak supposed that Balaam's art was limited by places. Therefore he took him to the top of Peor, thinking that the magician Balaam could curse the people of God from there. Peor is interpreted “sweetening” or “skin of the mouth,” that is, the height of the love of pleasure and the deadness of reason, by which Balaam tried to curse the people of God. [Of the same.] There are two summits, that of the highest virtue and that of vice; Moses ascended to the summit of virtue, and Balaam to the summit of vice. [Num 24:1] “He did not go, as was his custom, to meet the omens.” This Balaam is a symbol of the people from the Gentiles, who formerly followed omens but, knowing that this is not pleasing to the Lord, did not continue. And indeed Balaam is interpreted “vain”
Chapter 579
579PG 12:579a–579d
λαὸς, υίὸς δὲ Βεὼρ ἑρμηνεύεται δερμάτινος. Τὸ μὲν μάταιος ἦν κατὰ τὸ πρότερον τῶν ἐθνῶν, Βεὼρ δὲ τοῦ ἐν ματαιότητι καὶ ὲν νεκρότητι κατὰ τὸ πρότερον δηλονότι. Ἀνθρωπος ὀ ἀληθινῶς ὁρῶν. Ἐγὼ 6 ποτὲ Βαλαὰμ, ὁ λαὸς 6 μάταιος, διανοίξας τοὺς ἔσω μου ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ νοὸς, καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν πνευματικόν ποτε Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὑτὸν οἰκονομίαν, τῆς τοῦ ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἀξιοῦμαι. Οὐχ ἁρμόζει τῷ ποτὲ Βαλαὰμ τὸ, t Φησὶν 6 ἄνθρωπος ὁ ἀληθινῶς ὁρῶν, ι καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς, ἁλλʼ ἁρμόζει τῷ νῦν Βαλαάμ. Ὧς κα»ιοί οὶ οἴκοι σου, Ἰακὼβ, αἱ σκηναί σου. Ἰσραήλ. Τὸ ὖνομα τοῦ Ἰακὼβ, ού τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντός ἐστιν, ἁλλὰ τοῦ οῐκου· τὸ δὲ τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ ὄνομα, τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντός ἐστιʼ τοῦ γὰρ σωματικοῦ πράγματός ἐστι τὸ, Ἰακώβ. ’.Ωσεί νάπαι σκιάῶυσαι. Νάπαι νοηταί εἰσι σκιάζουσαι τὸ ὲν ᾧ λογικὰ ἔγκαρπα καὶ κατάκομα τῆς πραγματικῆς ἀρετῆς. Παράδεισοι ἐπὶ ποταμόν εἰσι νοητοὶ, τοπὸς ὲν ᾧ λογικὰ πεφύτευται ἀρδόμενα ἦτοι τῇ θεωρίᾳ τῶν γεγονότων, ἦ τῇ θεωρίᾳ τῆς ἁγίας Τ ριάδος. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Οί ὲν σκηναῖς οἰκοῦντες, τῶν ὁδευόντων εἰσί, καί ἐστιν ἔξω τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ὁδὸς μεγάλη καὶ πολλαί σκηναί. Οί ἐνοικοῦντες, οὐκ εἰσὶ τῶν ὁδευόντων, ἁλλὰ τῶν ἱσταμένων. Ὠσεί κέδροι παρʼ ὕδατα. Κέδρθι εἰσί νοηταὶ παρʼ ὕδατα φυείσαι ψυχαὶ λογικαὶ ἀρδόμεναι τῇ γνώσει τῆς ἀληθείας. Καὶ κυριεύσει ἐθνῶν πολλῶν. Κύριός ἐστιν 6 ὲξουσιαστικῶς προστάσσων, δοῦλος δὲ 6 δουλικῶς ὑπακούων. Κύριός ὲστιν ότοῖς ἰδίοις πόνοις ὀνούμενος καὶ τῇ κυριότητι πεποιωμένος ἐλεύθερος πάθους. Δοῦλός ἐστιν ό ἐμπαθὴς καὶ ἐπιδεὴς 106 κρείττονος, καὶ χρῄζων τῆς ἐπιστασίας τοῦ ἰδίου κυρίου. Εἰσὶ δὲ κύριοι πολλοὶ. μακάριοι δὲ οἱ 16v Κύριον ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἔχοντες κύριον. Καὶ ὑψωθήσεται ἡ Γὼγ,βασιλεία αὐτοῦ. Βασιο λεία Γὼγ ἑρμηνεύεται oliuae”. Κατὰ μίαν μὲν ὲκδοχὴν δόματά ἐστιν αἱ δωρεαὶ τοῦ ἁγίου Πνεύματος· κατὰ δὲ ἄλλην, ι '0 ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος μὴ καταβάτω εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν αὑτοῦ. ι Ἔστιν οὖν βασιλεία τῆς τοιαύτης ἕξεως. modi. '0 Θεὸς ὡδήγησεν αὐτὸν ἐξ Αἰγύπτου. Καὶ τὸν Σωτῆρα κατὰ τὸ, ι Ἐξ Αἰγύπτου ἐκάλεσα τὸν υἱόν μου, ι καὶ τὸν Ἰσραήλ. Τὸν μὲν ἐκβάλλει, τὸν δὲ καλεῖ. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. '0 χρηματισμὸς, τὸν Κύριον ἥξειν εἰς Αἴγυπτον, ἐδήλου τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ διακομιδὴν τὴν ἅμα τοῖς γονεῦσιν αὐτοῦ γενησομένην. Αἰγύπτῳ δὲ καὶ 6 κόσμος οὗτος παραβάλλεται. Ὧς δόξα μονοκέρωτος αὐτῷ. Μονόκερὼς ἐστιν
laos, uios de Beōr hermēneuetai dermatinos. To men mataios ēn kata to proteron tōn ethnōn, Beōr de tou en mataiotēti kai en nekrotēti kata to proteron dēlonoti. Anthrōpos o alēthinōs horōn. Egō 6 pote Balaam, ho laos 6 mataios, dianoixas tous esō mou ophthalmous tou noos, kai idōn ton pneumatikon pote Israēl, kai tēn katʼ hauton oikonomian, tēs tou hagiou Pneumatos axioumai. Ouch harmozei tǭ pote Balaam to, t Phēsin 6 anthrōpos ho alēthinōs horōn, i kai ta hexēs, hallʼ harmozei tǭ nyn Balaam. Hōs ka»ioi oi oikoi sou, Iakōb, hai skēnai sou. Israēl. To ynoma tou Iakōb, ou tou enoikountos estin, halla tou oikou; to de tou Israēl onoma, tou enoikountos estiʼ tou gar sōmatikou pragmatos esti to, Iakōb. ’.Ōsei napai skiaōysai. Napai noētai eisi skiazousai to en hǭ logika enkarpa kai katakoma tēs pragmatikēs aretēs. Paradeisoi epi potamon eisi noētoi, topos en hǭ logika pephyteutai ardomena ētoi tę̄ theōrią tōn gegonotōn, ē tę̄ theōrią tēs hagias T riados. Tou hautou. Oi en skēnais oikountes, tōn hodeuontōn eisi, kai estin exō tou kosmou toutou hodos megalē kai pollai skēnai. Oi enoikountes, ouk eisi tōn hodeuontōn, halla tōn histamenōn. Ōsei kedroi parʼ hydata. Kedrthi eisi noētai parʼ hydata phyeisai psychai logikai ardomenai tę̄ gnōsei tēs alētheias. Kai kyrieusei ethnōn pollōn. Kyrios estin 6 exousiastikōs prostassōn, doulos de 6 doulikōs hypakouōn. Kyrios estin otois idiois ponois onoumenos kai tę̄ kyriotēti pepoiōmenos eleutheros pathous. Doulos estin o empathēs kai epideēs 106 kreittonos, kai chrę̄zōn tēs epistasias tou idiou kyriou. Eisi de kyrioi polloi. makarioi de hoi 16v Kyrion hēmōn Iēsoun Christon echontes kyrion. Kai hypsōthēsetai hē Gōg,basileia autou. Basio leia Gōg hermēneuetai oliuae”. Kata mian men ekdochēn domata estin hai dōreai tou hagiou Pneumatos; kata de allēn, i '0 epi tou dōmatos mē katabatō eis tēn oikian hautou. i Estin oun basileia tēs toiautēs hexeōs. modi. '0 Theos hōdēgēsen auton ex Aigyptou. Kai ton Sōtēra kata to, i Ex Aigyptou ekalesa ton huion mou, i kai ton Israēl. Ton men ekballei, ton de kalei. Tou autou. '0 chrēmatismos, ton Kyrion hēxein eis Aigypton, edēlou tēn tou Sōtēros hēmōn Iēsou Christou diakomidēn tēn hama tois goneusin autou genēsomenēn. Aigyptǭ de kai 6 kosmos houtos paraballetai. Hōs doxa monokerōtos autǭ. Monokerōs estin
people,” and “son of Beor” is interpreted “made of skin.” He was “vain” in the former state of the Gentiles, and Beor refers to one in vanity and in deadness, plainly in that former state. [Num 24:3] “The man who truly sees.” I, once Balaam, the vain people, having opened the inner eyes of my mind and having seen the spiritual Israel and the economy concerning him, am counted worthy of the Holy Spirit. “Says the man who truly sees,” and so on, does not fit the former Balaam, but fits the present Balaam. [Num 24:5] “How fair are your houses, Jacob, your tents, Israel.” The name Jacob belongs not to the one who dwells but to the house; the name Israel belongs to the one who dwells; for “Jacob” belongs to the bodily state. [Num 24:6] “Like shady glens.” Intelligible glens are those that shade the place in which rational plants bear fruit and are leafy with practical virtue. Gardens by a river are intelligible: a place in which rational plants are planted, watered either by the contemplation of the things that have come to be or by the contemplation of the Holy Trinity. [Of the same.] Those who dwell in tents belong to those who are travelling, and outside this world there is a great road and many tents. Those who dwell in houses are not of the travellers but of those who stand still. “Like cedars by waters.” Intelligible cedars are rational souls grown by waters, watered by the knowledge of the truth. [Num 24:7] “And he shall rule over many nations.” A lord is one who commands with authority; a slave, one who obeys slavishly. A lord is one who has acquired lordship by his own toils and has been formed by it, free from passion. A slave is one subject to passion, who lacks the better and needs the oversight of his own lord. There are many lords; but blessed are those who have our Lord Jesus Christ as their lord. “And the kingdom of Gog shall be exalted.” Gog is interpreted “roofs.” In one interpretation the roofs are the gifts of the Holy Spirit; in another, “Let him who is on the roof not go down into his house.” There is, then, a kingdom of such a condition. [Num 24:8] “God led him out of Egypt.” Both the Saviour, according to “Out of Egypt I called my son,” and Israel: the one he casts out, the other he calls. [Of the same.] The oracle that the Lord would come into Egypt showed the journey of our Saviour Jesus Christ that was to take place with his parents. And this world too is compared to Egypt. [Num 24:8] “His glory is like a unicorn's.” The unicorn is
Chapter 581
581PG 12:582a–582d
νοητῶς ὁ Χριστὸς κατὰ τὸ συμβεβηκός· ἐξ οὗ μανόκεροι πολλοί. Ἀπὸ γὰρ ἑνὸς Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ πολλοὶ μετέσχον εἶναι χριστοί.· Τινές φασι καὶ τὸν ἔλαφον μονόκερον εἶναι. Ἕδεται ἔθνη τῶν ἐχθρῶν αὐτοῦ. Περὶ τοῦ Χριστοῦο ἐχθρῶν αὑτοῦ ἔθνη ἦμέν ποτε ἡμεῖς. Ἔδεται οὗν ἡμᾶς ὁ Χριστὸς, ἡ οὐσιὼδης ἀρετὴ νεμομενη ἡμᾶς, καθὰ λέγειʼ ι Ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστι τοῦ ποιῆσαι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με. ι Kal τὰ πάχη αὐτῶν ὲκμυελιεῖ. Τότε, φησὶν,ὅταν τὴν σαρκικὴν κατάστασιν εἰς πνευματικὴν διὰ τῆς πραγματικῆς μεταποιῇ. Ol εὐλογοῦντές σε ηὐλόγηνται. Δύο πρόσωπα σημαίνει ἐπὶ τούτοις· εἰσὶ δὲ τῶν πιστῶν καὶ ἀπίστων ἐπὶ τοῦ Χριστοῦ. Kal μετʼ ὀλίγιν Ἑν τού· τοις μὲν οὖν ἀνατέτραπται καὶ ἡ τῶν ἐναντιουμένων τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ ἐγχείρησις, καὶ ἡ τῆς μαγείας κακοτεχνία. Καὶ ἐβεβηλώθη ό λαός ἐκπορνεῦσαι. Ἦ δὲ γνώμη τοῦ πορνεῦσαι τοὺς Ἑβραίους καὶ προσκυνῆσαι τῷ Βεελφεγὼρ, τοῦ μάντεως ἦν. Διὸ φησὶ Moniiσῆς· ι Αὗται δὲ ἦσαν τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ, κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμα Βαλαὰμ, τοῦ ἀποστῆσαι καὶ ὑπεριδεῖν τὸ ῥῆμα Κυρίου ἕνεκεν Βεελφεγώρ. ι Kal ἔσται ὑμῖν τὸ κυῑίτος, τὸ πρὸς Λίβα. Ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ Αἰγύπτου ἕως τοῦ ποταμοῦ Εὑφράτου ἐπηγγείλατο τῷ Ἀβραάμ. Διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὑτοῖς; Οἱ γὰρ ’Λριομοὶ ἐλαττοτέραν διεομένην σημαίνουσιν. Οἶμαι δὲ ὅτι δέδωκεν ἂν, εἰ κατὰ τὸν λαβόντα τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, πιστοὶ ἦσαν. Καὶ τοῦτο εἰκότως. Πολλάκις γὰρ κακᾶ ἀπειλήσας οὐκ ἐπήγαγε, μετενόησαν γὰρ,ὡς ἐπὶ τῶν Νινευιτῶν. Πλὴν ἐκ τοῦ δήμου τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῶν ἔσονται γυναῖκες. -Προστάττει οὖν ὁ Θεὸς πλὴν τῆς Ἰούδα καὶ τῆς Λευῒ μὴ ἐξεῖναι ἀπὸ φυλῆς είς φυλὴν συνάπτεσθαι, ἵνα μὴ ξένον τοῦ Σωτῆρος δειχθῇ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενον, τὸ, ι Βασιλεὺς καὶ ἱερεὺς κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισεδέκ. ι
noētōs ho Christos kata to symbebēkos; ex hou manokeroi polloi. Apo gar henos Iēsou Christou polloi meteschon einai christoi.; Tines phasi kai ton elaphon monokeron einai. Hedetai ethnē tōn echthrōn autou. Peri tou Christouo echthrōn hautou ethnē ēmen pote hēmeis. Edetai houn hēmas ho Christos, hē ousiōdēs aretē nemomenē hēmas, katha legeiʼ i Emon brōma esti tou poiēsai to thelēma tou pempsantos me. i Kal ta pachē autōn ekmyeliei. Tote, phēsin,hotan tēn sarkikēn katastasin eis pneumatikēn dia tēs pragmatikēs metapoię̄. Ol eulogountes se ēulogēntai. Dyo prosōpa sēmainei epi toutois; eisi de tōn pistōn kai apistōn epi tou Christou. Kal metʼ oligin Hen tou; tois men oun anatetraptai kai hē tōn enantioumenōn tou Israēl encheirēsis, kai hē tēs mageias kakotechnia. Kai ebebēlōthē o laos ekporneusai. Ē de gnōmē tou porneusai tous Hebraious kai proskynēsai tǭ Beelphegōr, tou manteōs ēn. Dio phēsi Moniisēs; i Hautai de ēsan tois huiois Israēl, kata to rhēma Balaam, tou apostēsai kai hyperidein to rhēma Kyriou heneken Beelphegōr. i Kal estai hymin to kuiitos, to pros Liba. Apo tou potamou Aigyptou heōs tou potamou Heuphratou epēngeilato tǭ Abraam. Dia ti oun ouk edōken hautois? Hoi gar ’Lriomoi elattoteran dieomenēn sēmainousin. Oimai de hoti dedōken an, ei kata ton labonta tas epangelias, pistoi ēsan. Kai touto eikotōs. Pollakis gar kaka apeilēsas ouk epēgage, metenoēsan gar,hōs epi tōn Nineuitōn. Plēn ek tou dēmou tou patros autōn esontai gynaikes. -Prostattei oun ho Theos plēn tēs Iouda kai tēs Leuï mē exeinai apo phylēs eis phylēn synaptesthai, hina mē xenon tou Sōtēros deichthę̄ anōthen erchomenon, to, i Basileus kai hiereus kata tēn taxin Melchisedek. i
in an intelligible sense Christ, by accident, as it were; from him come many unicorns. For from one Jesus Christ many have come to share in being christs. Some say the deer too is a unicorn. [Num 24:8] “He shall eat the nations of his enemies.” This concerns Christ: we were once the nations of his enemies. Christ, then, will eat us, essential virtue feeding on us, as he says: “My food is to do the will of him who sent me.” “And he shall suck out their marrow.” Then, it says, when he changes the fleshly state into the spiritual through the practical life. [Num 24:9] “Those who bless you are blessed.” He signifies two persons in these words, the faithful and the unfaithful, with regard to Christ. And a little later. In these words, then, both the enterprise of those opposing Israel and the evil art of magic are overturned. [Num 25:1] “And the people were profaned by committing sexual immorality.” The plan that the Hebrews should commit sexual immorality and worship Baal-peor was the diviner's. Therefore Moses says: “These were to the sons of Israel, according to the word of Balaam, to make them revolt and despise the word of the Lord because of Baal-peor.” [Num 34:3] “And your side toward the south shall be.” He promised Abraham from the river of Egypt to the river Euphrates. Why then did he not give it to them? For Numbers indicates a smaller portion. I think he would have given it if they had been faithful like the one who received the promises. And this fittingly; for often, having threatened evils, he did not bring them, because they repented, as with the Ninevites. [Num 36:6] “Only they shall be wives from the clan of their father.” God commands, then, that except for the tribes of Judah and Levi it is not permitted to be joined from tribe to tribe, so that “a king and priest according to the order of Melchizedek” might not be shown to be foreign to the Saviour who comes from above.
Chapter 801
801PG 12:801a–801d
Ἐλάλησε Μωῡσῆς πρὸς πάντας υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ πάντα ὅσα ἐνετείλατο Κύριος αὐτῷ. Ἐπειδὴ ὁ μὲν Θεὸς τὴν δύναμιν ἁπεκὰλυπτεν ’ ὁ δὲ προφήτης τῇ ἑαυτοῦ γλώσσῃ ἐκέχρητο πρὸς παράστασιν τῶν δεδηλωμένων. Κίνησις οὖν λέγεται ἡ προφητικὴ φωνὴ, οἷα παριστῶσα τὰ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ εἰρημένα. Καὶ εἶπα πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ. Οὐχ ἁπλῶς ὁ Μωῦσῆς φησιν, ι εἶπον ὑμῖνοι ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ ἔμελλεν αὐτοῦ ἀναχωρήσαντος διαδέχεσθαι αὐτὸν Ἰησοῦς ὁ τοῦ Ναυῆ, οὐκ ἄτοπόν φησι τὸ πρᾶγμα, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἑπόμενον. Προλαὸὼν γὰρ, φησὶ, παρεκάλεσα, καὶ, ὼς ἐπενεύσατε, ἐπέστησα κριτάςο ὥστε καὶ τῷ κατὰ προφητικὴν χάριν καὶ ὁδηγητικὴν διαδεχομένῳ με Ἰησοῦ τῷ τοῦ Ναυῆ πείθεσθε. Οὐ δυνήσομαι μόνος φέρειν ὑμᾶς. Καὶ τῶν προτέρων μεμνημένος, οὐκ ἀπʼ Αἰγύπτου ἄρχεται· ἀλλʼ ἀφʼ οὗ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς δικαστὰς σοφοὺς καὶ παιδευτάς. Ἕδωκα τῷ Ῥουβὶμ καὶ τῷ me. Οἱ ὑποδεέστεροι
Elalēse Mōysēs pros pantas huious Israēl kata panta hosa eneteilato Kyrios autǭ. Epeidē ho men Theos tēn dynamin hapekalypten ’ ho de prophētēs tę̄ heautou glōssę̄ ekechrēto pros parastasin tōn dedēlōmenōn. Kinēsis oun legetai hē prophētikē phōnē, hoia paristōsa ta hypo Theou eirēmena. Kai eipa pros hymas en tǭ kairǭ ekeinǭ. Ouch haplōs ho Mōysēs phēsin, i eipon hyminoi allʼ epeidē emellen autou anachōrēsantos diadechesthai auton Iēsous ho tou Nauē, ouk atopon phēsi to pragma, alla kai hepomenon. Prolaoōn gar, phēsi, parekalesa, kai, ōs epeneusate, epestēsa kritaso hōste kai tǭ kata prophētikēn charin kai hodēgētikēn diadechomenǭ me Iēsou tǭ tou Nauē peithesthe. Ou dynēsomai monos pherein hymas. Kai tōn proterōn memnēmenos, ouk apʼ Aigyptou archetai; allʼ aphʼ hou edōken autois dikastas sophous kai paideutas. Hedōka tǭ Rhoubim kai tǭ me. Hoi hypodeesteroi
[Deut 1:3] “Moses spoke to all the sons of Israel according to all that the Lord commanded him.” Since God revealed the power, while the prophet used his own tongue to set forth what had been made known, the prophetic voice is called a movement, as setting forth what was spoken by God. [Deut 1:9] “And I said to you at that time.” Moses does not simply say, “I said to you”; but since Joshua son of Nun was to succeed him after his departure, he says that the matter is not strange but consistent. For, he says, I exhorted you beforehand, and when you consented I appointed judges; so obey Joshua son of Nun too, who succeeds me by prophetic and guiding grace. “I shall not be able to bear you alone.” In recalling earlier events he does not begin from Egypt, but from the time when he gave them wise judges and instructors. [Deut 3:12] “I gave to Reuben and to Gad.” The lesser
Chapter 803
803PG 12:804a–804d
τάχιον ἐν τῇ ἐπαγγελίᾳ γίνονται· οἱ δὲ ἐπιεικέστεροι βράδιον άπολαμβάνουσιν. Οἱ μὲν γὰρ ὑπὸ Μωῦσέως τρῶτοι εἰλήφασι τὴν κληρονομίαψ oi δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὕστερον. Ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ πάντων δικαίων λέγεται, οὐ τῶν τυχόντων· ὡς γὰρ ό Ἀπόστολός φησιν· ι Οὗτοι πάντες μαρτυρηθέντες διὰ τῆς πίστεως οὐκ ἐκομίσαντο τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, τοῦ Θεοῦ περὶ ἡμῶν κρεῖττόν τι προβλεψαμένου, ἵνα μὴ χωρὶς ὴμῶν τελειωθῶσιν. ι Φωνὴν ῥημάτων ἣν ὑμεῖς ἠκούσατε, καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. Οὐχ ὅτι ὁρατὴ ἡ φωνὴ, οὐδʼ ὅτι φύσει φωνὴν ἔχει ό Θεὸς τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ συνθέτου φύσεως ἂν εἴηʼ ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ καὶ αἱ σάλπιγγες, καὶ αἱ φωναὶ, ὡς αὐτὸς οἶδεν ὁ Θεὸς, ἐπετελοῦντο ἐκ τῆς τῶν ὁρωμένων συνεχείας δημιουργούμεναι στοιχείων· τοῦ πυρὸς λέγω ιαὶ τοῦ γνόφου· ὥστε καὶ ἀκούεται φωνὴ, καὶ οὐχ ὁρᾶται· ἀλλʼ οὖν ἐπί τῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ θαυμάτων καὶ ἡ φωνὴ ὁρᾶται. Καὶ ὤμοσεν ἵνα μὴ διαδῶ τὸν Ἰορδάνην τοῦτον. Μωῦσῆς, μὴ δοξάσας τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ λαοῦ, ἐκωλύθη παρελθεῖν μετʼ αὐτῶν, ἴνα μὴ ὃν ἐτίμων ζῶντα, ὲν θεῶν θεραπείαις τιμήσωσιν ἀπελθόντα. Διὸ δὴ καὶ ἀποθανόντος ἀφανῆ τὸν τάφον ἐποίησεν. Διαμαρτύρομαι ὑμῖν σήμερον τόν τε οἰψανόν καί τὴν γῆν. Ὀ Θεὸς τοὺς αὑτὸν προσκυνοῦντας οὑ συγο χωρῶν δαίμοσι συνάπτεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τοὺς anas, αὐτὸν ἐγνωκότας ἐκτὸς εἶναι κελεύων τῆς πρὸς ἐκείνους δια-ι θέσεως, καὶ παραζηλῶν ἐν τῇ ἀποστασία τῶν λαῶν, τὰς μελλούσας αὐτοῖς προλέγει τιμωρίας διὰ τὴν πονηρίαν τῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων αὐτῶν. Ἐξ οικου δουλείας. Καὶ γὰρ ἀληθῶς τὰ σωματικὰ πράγματα καὶ ὐλικὰ, οἶκός ἐστι δουλείας, ὥσπερ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων οἶκός ἐστιν ἐλευθερίας. Ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ὀλιγοστοὶ παρὰ πάντα τὰ ἕβνη. Καλῶς τοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς μερίδος εἴρηται· ι Ὀλιι· γοστοῑ ἐστε παρὰ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη. ι Συγγενῶς τε τὸ, ι Ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι, ι καὶ τὸ, ι Ἀγωνίζεσθε είσελθεῖν διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης. ι ’Ὁτι οὐκ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται ἅνθρωπος, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ παντὶ ῥήματι, καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. Πάλιν τε αὖ ὅτι τὸ μάννα λόγος ἦν, εἰ καὶ ἄρτος δηλοῦται ἐν τῇ Ἐξόδῳ. ι Οὗτος γὰρ, φησιν, ὁ ἄρτος δν ἔδωκε Κύριος ὑμῖν φαγεῖν. Τοῦτο τὸ ῥῆμα ὃ συνέταξε Κύριος. ι Διὰ τοῦτο δέ τὸ μάννα ι λεπτὸν ἦν ὡσεὶ κόριον λευκὸν, ὡσεὶ πάγος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς· ι ἐπειδήπερ ό λόγος οὗ σύμβολον ἦν τὸ μάννα ἐκεῖνο, λεπτόν ἐστιτῇ αύτοῦ φύσει, καὶ διῆκον διὰ πάντων πνευμάτων νοερῶν, καθαρῶν, λεπτοτάτων. Ἔστιδέ καὶ ἠ σοφία πνεῦμα νοερὸν, ἅγιον, μονογενὲς, πολυμερὲς, λεπτὸν, καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς. Ἦν δὲ καὶ ὡσεὶ κόριον πρὸς τὸ εἶναι λευκόν. Φασὶ δὲ τὴν τοῦ κορίου φύσιν ὃλην διʼ ὅλων λόγον ἔχειν σπέρματος, ὡς μηδέ ὲν τῷ κατακόπτεσθαι τὺ τοῦ κορίου σπέρμα, ἐξαφανίζεσθαι αὐτοῦ τὴν δύναμιν, ὼς οὐκ ἔτι δυναμένην σπείρεσθαι. Τοιοῦτος δὲ διʼ ὅλου ό λόγοςʼ καὶ πᾶν μόριον αὐτοῦ γεωργεῖσθαι
tachion en tę̄ epangelią ginontai; hoi de epieikesteroi bradion apolambanousin. Hoi men gar hypo Mōyseōs trōtoi eilēphasi tēn klēronomiaps oi de hypo tou Iēsou hysteron. Alla kai peri pantōn dikaiōn legetai, ou tōn tychontōn; hōs gar o Apostolos phēsin; i Houtoi pantes martyrēthentes dia tēs pisteōs ouk ekomisanto tēn epangelian, tou Theou peri hēmōn kreitton ti problepsamenou, hina mē chōris ēmōn teleiōthōsin. i Phōnēn rhēmatōn hēn hymeis ēkousate, kai ta hexēs. Ouch hoti horatē hē phōnē, oudʼ hoti physei phōnēn echei o Theos touto gar kai synthetou physeōs an eiēʼ allʼ epeidē kai hai salpinges, kai hai phōnai, hōs autos oiden ho Theos, epetelounto ek tēs tōn horōmenōn synecheias dēmiourgoumenai stoicheiōn; tou pyros legō iai tou gnophou; hōste kai akouetai phōnē, kai ouch horatai; allʼ oun epi tōn tou Theou thaumatōn kai hē phōnē horatai. Kai ōmosen hina mē diadō ton Iordanēn touton. Mōysēs, mē doxasas ton Theon epi tou laou, ekōlythē parelthein metʼ autōn, ina mē hon etimōn zōnta, en theōn therapeiais timēsōsin apelthonta. Dio dē kai apothanontos aphanē ton taphon epoiēsen. Diamartyromai hymin sēmeron ton te oipsanon kai tēn gēn. O Theos tous hauton proskynountas hou sygo chōrōn daimosi synaptesthai, alla tous anas, auton egnōkotas ektos einai keleuōn tēs pros ekeinous dia-i theseōs, kai parazēlōn en tę̄ apostasia tōn laōn, tas mellousas autois prolegei timōrias dia tēn ponērian tōn epitēdeumatōn autōn. Ex oikou douleias. Kai gar alēthōs ta sōmatika pragmata kai ylika, oikos esti douleias, hōsper ek tōn enantiōn oikos estin eleutherias. Hymeis gar este oligostoi para panta ta hebnē. Kalōs tois apo tēs meridos eirētai; i Olii; gostoi este para panta ta ethnē. i Syngenōs te to, i Oligoi hoi sōzomenoi, i kai to, i Agōnizesthe eiselthein dia tēs stenēs pylēs. i ’Hoti ouk epʼ artǭ monǭ zēsetai hanthrōpos, allʼ epi panti rhēmati, kai ta hexēs. Palin te au hoti to manna logos ēn, ei kai artos dēloutai en tę̄ Exodǭ. i Houtos gar, phēsin, ho artos dn edōke Kyrios hymin phagein. Touto to rhēma ho synetaxe Kyrios. i Dia touto de to manna i lepton ēn hōsei korion leukon, hōsei pagos epi tēs gēs; i epeidēper o logos hou symbolon ēn to manna ekeino, lepton estitę̄ autou physei, kai diēkon dia pantōn pneumatōn noerōn, katharōn, leptotatōn. Estide kai ē sophia pneuma noeron, hagion, monogenes, polymeres, lepton, kai ta hexēs. Ēn de kai hōsei korion pros to einai leukon. Phasi de tēn tou koriou physin holēn diʼ holōn logon echein spermatos, hōs mēde en tǭ katakoptesthai ty tou koriou sperma, exaphanizesthai autou tēn dynamin, ōs ouk eti dynamenēn speiresthai. Toioutos de diʼ holou o logosʼ kai pan morion autou geōrgeisthai
come sooner into the promise, while the better receive it more slowly. For the former received their inheritance first, under Moses; the latter later, under Joshua. But it is said also of all the righteous, not of ordinary people; for, as the Apostle says, “These all, having been attested through faith, did not receive the promise, God having foreseen something better for us, so that they should not be made perfect without us.” [Deut 4:12] “You heard a sound of words,” and so on. Not that the voice is visible, nor that God has a voice by nature, for that would belong to a composite nature; but since the trumpets and the voices, as God himself knows, were produced, being fashioned from the continuity of the visible elements, I mean the fire and the darkness, a voice is both heard and not seen; yet in the case of God's wonders the voice too is seen. [Deut 4:21] “And he swore that I should not cross this Jordan.” Because Moses did not glorify God before the people, he was prevented from crossing with them, so that they should not honour with the worship of gods after his departure the one whom they honoured while he lived. For this reason, when he died, God made his tomb unseen. [Deut 4:26] “I call heaven and earth to witness against you today.” God, who does not permit those who worship him to be joined to demons, but commands those who have known him to keep clear of attachment to them, and who is provoked to jealousy by the apostasy of the peoples, foretells the punishments to come upon them for the wickedness of their practices. [Deut 5:6] “Out of the house of slavery.” For truly bodily and material things are a house of slavery, just as their opposites are a house of freedom. [Deut 7:7] “For you are the fewest of all the nations.” It is well said to those who are the Lord's portion, “You are the fewest of all the nations.” Akin to it are “Few are those being saved” and “Strive to enter through the narrow gate.” [Deut 8:3] “That man shall not live by bread alone, but by every word,” and so on. Again, the manna was the word, even if it is called bread in Exodus: “This,” it says, “is the bread which the Lord gave you to eat. This is the word which the Lord commanded.” For this reason the manna was “fine as coriander seed, white, like frost on the ground”: since the word of which that manna was a symbol is fine in its nature and passes through all intelligent, pure, and most subtle spirits. Wisdom too is “a spirit intelligent, holy, only-begotten, manifold, subtle,” and so on. And it was like coriander in being white. They say that the coriander has throughout the nature of seed, so that even when the coriander seed is cut up its power is not destroyed, so as no longer to be capable of being sown. Such throughout is the word; and every part of it is of a nature to be cultivated
Chapter 805
805PG 12:805a–805d
πέφυκεν ἐν καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, τουτέστι ψυχῆς. "Eo": δὲ τὸ,μάννα λευκόν. Φῶς γὰρ 6 λόγος καὶ λαμπρὸν, καὶ κατὰ τοῦτο λευκὸν, τῷ αὑτὸν συνιέντι καὶ τρεφομένῳ ὑπʼ αὑτοῦ. Ἐστι δὲ καὶ ὡσεὶ πάγοςο συνεστραμμένος γὰρ, καὶ οὐδαμοῦ πλαδῶν, οὑδέ διερρυηκὼς, ἀλλὰ πάγιος, ἃ δὴ οὐρανοῦ λόγος, καὶ ἀπαγγέλλων ἡμῖν τὰ οὐράνια. Ὀ γὰρ Κύριος ὀ Θεός σου εἰσαγάγῃ σε εὶς γῆν ἀγαθὴν καὶ πολλήν. Ἡμῖν 6 Χριστὸς ού ταῦτα δώσειν ὑπέσχετο, ἀλλὰ οὐρανῶν βασιλείαν, καὶ γῆν ἀγαθὴν καὶ ἀΐδιον, ἦς χείμαρρος 6 Χριστὸς, ποτίζων τοῖς τῆς σοφίας νάμασιν. Ἐκπορεύονται δὲ οἱ χείμαρροι διὰ τῶν πεδίων καὶ ταπεινῶν καὶ γονίμων ἀνθ ρώπων, xai. διὰ τῶν ὑψηλῶν ὀρέων, τῶν ἀνατεινομένων διὰ τὸ ὕψος τῆς Θεωρίας είς οὐρανούς. Ἐκεῖ 6 οἶτος 6 στηρίζων καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου, καὶ κριθὴ τοὺς ὑποδεεστέρους τρέφουσα. Ἐκεῖ ἡ ἀληθινὴ ἄμπελος 6 Χριστός. Ἐκεῖ τὸ ἔλαιον τὸ λιπαῖνον τῶν ὁσίων τὰς κεφαλάς. Ὁμοίως καὶ ῥοαὶ, τὸ γλυκὺ μὲν ἔνδοθεν φέρουσαι, τῆς πολιτείας δὲ τὸ αὐστηρὸν ἔξωθεν ἐνδυσάμεναι. Ἐκεῖ ἡ συκῆ, οὐχ ἡ ἄκαρπος καὶ φύλλοις κομῶσα, ἀλλʼ ἡ πλουτοῦσα τοῦ πνεύματος τὴν γλυκύτητα. Ἐκεῖ 6 γλυκασμὺς τοῦ φάρυγγος τοῦ Σωτῆρος ὀ ἐπιθυμητὸς, καὶ τὰ χείλη τῆς ἐν τῷ ᾅσματι νύμφης κηρίον ἀποστάζοντα, καὶ οἱ λίθοι οἱ ἅγιοι, o! ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς κυλισθέντες πρὸς πειρασμοὺς ἁνένδοτοι, xui. φύσιν σιδήρου ἀπομιμούμενοι. Ἐκεῖ τὰ μέταλλα τοῦ· χαλκοῦ, ἐξ οἶ) τὴν νοητὴν πανοπλίαν κατεσκεύασαν. Καὶ τὸ τούτων κεφάλαιον ἀπαύστως εὐλογεῖν τὸν Θεὸν. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ούκ ἐστι, φησὶ, πηλῷ καὶ πλινθείᾳ μοχθεῖν, καὶ ταλαιπωρεῖν, ἀλλὰ λίθους ἔχειν καὶ τούτους ἰταμωτάτους, καὶ μὴ ῥᾳδίως διαλυομένους, ὡς καὶ οἰκοδομίαις ἐξαρκεῖν καὶ ἐπὶ πολὺ διαμένειν. Ταῦτα δέ λέγει τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν ἀποστῆναι τῆς Αἰγύπτου βουλόμενος. Διὰ γὰρ τοῦ εἰπεῖν, ι ἀγαθὴν,› τὸ γόνιμον ἔδειξε· διὰ δὲ τοῦ, ι πολλὴν, ι τὸ μέγεθος καὶ τὸ πλάτος. ι Οῦ χείμαρροι ὑδάτων (τοῦτο οὐκ ὲν Αἰγύπτῳ), καὶ πηγαὶ ἀβύσσων· ι ὅπερ ἐξαίρετον τῇ γῇ τῆς ἐπαγγελίας. Προσέθηκε δὲ καὶ ι διὰ τῶν ὀρέων· ι ὅπερ τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ οὐ πρόσεστιν, ἀλλʼ οὐδὲ ἀμπέλοις κομᾷ, οὐδὲ ἀφθονίαν ἔχει ἐλαίου· ἡ δὲ τῆς ἐπαγγελίας γῆ πάντα πλουσίως. Πρόσεχε σεαυτῷ, μὴ ἐπιλάβῃ Κυρίου τοῦ Θεοῦ σου. Μετὰ τὴν τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐπαγγελίαν εἰς νῆψιν αὐτοὺς διανίστησιν, τοῦ εὐεργέτου μεμνῆσθαι, καὶ μὴ ἐξυβρίζειν τῷ κόρῳ, μηδὲ περιφρονεῖν τοῦ ταῦτα δωρησαμένου, καὶ ὄτι ἐκ τῆς ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ δουλείας είς ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοὺς μετεκόμισεν. Οὺ ποιήσεις οὕτως Κυρίῳ τῷ Θεῷ σου. Aletiται τὸ θύειν τὰ ἑαυτῶν τέκνα τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τοῖς θεοῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὡς ὠμὸν καὶ ἀπάνθρωπονο ὡς βδελυγτόν. Καὶ τοὺς λέγοντας θύσαι θεοῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν οὐ μόνον ἀποστρέφεσθαι δεῖ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν ἀκοὴν τοῖς id) 3t; αὐτῶν μὴ ὑπέχειν.
pephyken en kalę̄ kai agathę̄, toutesti psychēs. "Eo": de to,manna leukon. Phōs gar 6 logos kai lampron, kai kata touto leukon, tǭ hauton synienti kai trephomenǭ hypʼ hautou. Esti de kai hōsei pagoso synestrammenos gar, kai oudamou pladōn, houde dierryēkōs, alla pagios, ha dē ouranou logos, kai apangellōn hēmin ta ourania. O gar Kyrios o Theos sou eisagagę̄ se eis gēn agathēn kai pollēn. Hēmin 6 Christos ou tauta dōsein hypescheto, alla ouranōn basileian, kai gēn agathēn kai aïdion, ēs cheimarros 6 Christos, potizōn tois tēs sophias namasin. Ekporeuontai de hoi cheimarroi dia tōn pediōn kai tapeinōn kai gonimōn anth rōpōn, xai. dia tōn hypsēlōn oreōn, tōn anateinomenōn dia to hypsos tēs Theōrias eis ouranous. Ekei 6 oitos 6 stērizōn kardian anthrōpou, kai krithē tous hypodeesterous trephousa. Ekei hē alēthinē ampelos 6 Christos. Ekei to elaion to lipainon tōn hosiōn tas kephalas. Homoiōs kai rhoai, to glyky men endothen pherousai, tēs politeias de to austēron exōthen endysamenai. Ekei hē sykē, ouch hē akarpos kai phyllois komōsa, allʼ hē ploutousa tou pneumatos tēn glykytēta. Ekei 6 glykasmys tou pharyngos tou Sōtēros o epithymētos, kai ta cheilē tēs en tǭ hąsmati nymphēs kērion apostazonta, kai hoi lithoi hoi hagioi, o! epi tēs gēs kylisthentes pros peirasmous hanendotoi, xui. physin sidērou apomimoumenoi. Ekei ta metalla tou; chalkou, ex oi) tēn noētēn panoplian kateskeuasan. Kai to toutōn kephalaion apaustōs eulogein ton Theon. Tou autou. Ouk esti, phēsi, pēlǭ kai plintheią mochthein, kai talaipōrein, alla lithous echein kai toutous itamōtatous, kai mē rhądiōs dialyomenous, hōs kai oikodomiais exarkein kai epi poly diamenein. Tauta de legei tēn dianoian autōn apostēnai tēs Aigyptou boulomenos. Dia gar tou eipein, i agathēn,› to gonimon edeixe; dia de tou, i pollēn, i to megethos kai to platos. i Ou cheimarroi hydatōn (touto ouk en Aigyptǭ), kai pēgai abyssōn; i hoper exaireton tę̄ gę̄ tēs epangelias. Prosethēke de kai i dia tōn oreōn; i hoper tę̄ Aigyptǭ ou prosestin, allʼ oude ampelois komą, oude aphthonian echei elaiou; hē de tēs epangelias gē panta plousiōs. Proseche seautǭ, mē epilabę̄ Kyriou tou Theou sou. Meta tēn tōn agathōn epangelian eis nēpsin autous dianistēsin, tou euergetou memnēsthai, kai mē exybrizein tǭ korǭ, mēde periphronein tou tauta dōrēsamenou, kai oti ek tēs en Aigyptǭ douleias eis eleutherian autous metekomisen. Ou poiēseis houtōs Kyriǭ tǭ Theǭ sou. Aletitai to thyein ta heautōn tekna tous anthrōpous tois theois tōn ethnōn, hōs ōmon kai apanthrōpono hōs bdelygton. Kai tous legontas thysai theois tōn ethnōn ou monon apostrephesthai dei, alla kai tēn akoēn tois id) 3t? autōn mē hypechein.
in a noble and good heart, that is, soul. And the manna is white; for the word is light and bright, and in this respect white to one who understands it and is nourished by it. And it is like frost; for it is compact, nowhere moist or running apart, but firm, since it is the word of heaven and announces heavenly things to us. [Deut 8:7] “For the Lord your God brings you into a good and broad land.” Christ promised to give us not these things but the kingdom of heaven, and a good and eternal land, whose torrent is Christ, watering it with the streams of wisdom. The torrents go out through the plains, the humble and fruitful people, and through the high mountains, those who stretch up to heaven by the height of their contemplation. There is the bread that strengthens man's heart, and barley that feeds the lesser. There is the true vine, Christ. There is the oil that anoints the heads of the holy. Likewise pomegranates, bearing sweetness within, but clothed outwardly with the austerity of their way of life. There is the fig tree, not the barren one luxuriant with leaves, but the one rich in the sweetness of the Spirit. There is the desirable sweetness of the Saviour's throat, and the lips of the bride in the Song dripping honeycomb, and the holy stones which, rolled upon the earth, do not yield to temptations and imitate the nature of iron. There are the mines of bronze, from which they made the intelligible full armour. And the sum of these is to bless God unceasingly. [Of the same.] It is not, he says, toiling and suffering with clay and brick-making, but having stones, and those very hard and not easily dissolved, so as to suffice for buildings and to last a long time. He says this because he wishes their mind to turn away from Egypt. By saying “good” he showed its fertility; by “broad” its size and breadth. “Where there are torrents of waters” (this is not in Egypt) “and springs of the deeps,” which is special to the land of promise. He added also “through the mountains,” which does not belong to Egypt; nor is Egypt luxuriant with vines, nor does it have abundance of oil; but the land of promise has all things richly. [Deut 8:11] “Take heed to yourself, lest you forget the Lord your God.” After the promise of good things he rouses them to sobriety: to remember their benefactor, not to grow insolent from satiety nor to despise the one who gave these things, and to remember that he brought them from slavery in Egypt to freedom. [Deut 12:31] “You shall not do so to the Lord your God.” He condemns the sacrificing of their own children by men to the gods of the nations, as cruel and inhuman, as abominable. And those who say, “Sacrifice to the gods of the nations,” one must not only turn away from, but must not even lend an ear to their words.
Chapter 807
807PG 12:808a–808d
οὺ προσθήσεις ἐπʼ αὐτὸ, οὐδὲ ἀφελεῖς ἀπʼ αὑτοῦ. Ol ἄνθρωποι ἁμαρτάνοντες γενικῷ λόγῳ διχῶς ἁμαρτάνουσιν, ἢ ὐπε ρ6αίνοντες τὰς ἐντολὰς ἢ ὑποκενοῦντες. Ὅταν γὰρ μὴ ἀπὸ ἐπιστήμης πολιτευόμεθα, μηδὲ γινώσκοντες τὰ μέτρα τῆς δικαιοσύνης σφαλλόμεθα, καὶ ἐσθʼ ὅτε ὑπερβαίνοντες τὸν κα·νόνα, φαντασίᾳ τοῦ ποιεῖν τι κρεῖττον, ἐκπίπτομεν τοῦ προκειμένου. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Ui οὖν μὴ ποιοῦντες πάντα, ἢ οι πλεῖόν τι ποιοῦντες, παράνομοι. Πᾶν κτῆνος διχηλοῦν ὁπλὴν, καὶ ἀνάγον μηρυκισμόν. Τὸ μὲν διχηλεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς ὁπλῆς, τὴν πορείαν καθʼ ἣν πρὸς πᾶν ὁτιοῦν ἐρχόμεθα τῶν ἀγαθῶν σπρυδασμάτων ἐμφάνειενο ὁ δὲ μηρυκισμὸς, τὸ ἄνω τε καὶ κάτω ποιεῖν τῆς θεοπνεύστου Γραφῆς τοὺς λόγους, καὶ οἷον ἀναμασᾶσθαι καὶ καταλεπτύνειν ἐρεύναις τά κεκρυμμένα τῶν θεωρημάτων. Πάντα ὅσα ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτοῖς πτερύγια καὶ,κεπίδες, φάγεσθε. Τῶν πτηνῶν οἶμαι ὅσα μὲν σκόλοπας ἔχει κατωτέρω τῶν γονάτων ὑπὲρ τὰς βάσεις καθαρὰ εἶναι βούλεται· ὅσα δὲ μὴ, ἀκάθαρτα. Ἑορτὴν σκηνῶν ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας. Εὑρίσκομεν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς τὸ ὄνομα τῆς ἑορτῆς καὶ τῆς πανηγύρεως, ὥσπερ παρὰ τῷ προφήτῃ λέγοντι ι Τί ποιήσετε ἐν ἡμέρᾳ πανηγύρεως καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἑορτῆς Κυρίου; ι Ζητητέον τὴν διαφορὰν ἑορτῆς καὶ πανηγύρεως. Πᾶσα μὲν οὖν, ἵνʼ οὕτως εἴπω, ἱλαρὰ ἡμέρα, ὲν προστέτακται ὡς ἐν ἁγία τάδε τινὰ παρὰ τὰς λοιπὰς ποιεῖν ἐξαίρετα, ἑορτὴ καλεῖται· οὐ πᾶσα δέ ἐστι πανήγυρις, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα, ὅτε ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ συναθροίζονται οἱ πανταχόθεν Ἑβραῖοι, ὥστε κατὰ τοῦτο τὴν μὲν πανήγυριν εἶναι ἑορτὴν, οὐκέτι δὲ πάντως τὴν ἑορτὴν πανήγυριν · οἷον σάββατα καὶ νεομηνίαι, ἑορταί εἰσινο ἄζυμα δὲ καὶ αἱ ἡμέραι τῶν ἑβδομάδων καὶ σκηνοπηγίαι οὺ μόνον αἱ ἑορταὶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πανηγύρεις, ὅτε προστέτακται πᾶν ἀρσενικὸν φαίνεσθαι ἐνώπιον Κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου είς τὸν τόπον ὃν ἂν ἐκλέξηται. Οὐ μετακινήσεις ὅρια τοῦ πλησίον σου. Πλησίον πολλαχοῦ πᾶς ἄνθρωπος εἴρηται. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. υύτε γὰρ δεῖ τοὺς πέλας πλεονεκτεῖν, οὐδὲ τοὺς τῶν πατέρων ὅρους ὼς καλῶς παγέντας παρακελεύειν. Τοῦτο γὰρ αἴτιον πάσης συγχύσεως ἔσται, τῶν ’μὲν ὁμορούντων ὡς ἀδικουμένων, περιφρονουμένων δὲ τῶν ὁρισάντων. Πλησίον δέ τινες πάντα ἄνθρωπον λέγουσιν. Ἐὰν δὲ καταστῇ μάρτυς ἄδικος κατὰ ἀνθρώ-ο που. Ταῦτα μὲν ὁ νόμος πρὸς ἀσθενεῖς τοὺς Ἰσραηλίτας ὁ δὲ Κύριος ό ταῦτα νομοθετήσας τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μαθηταῖς φησιν· ι Ἠκούσατε suggestu, Ὀφθαλμὸν ἀντὶ ὀφθαλμοῦ, ι καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς, ι Ἐγὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ ἀντιστῆναι τῷ πονηρῷ. ι Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Ταῦτα μὲν ἐπὶ αἰσθητοῦ καὶ τῶν κατὰ κόσμον, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ἡμαρτημένων ἡμῖν, οὐδενὸς δεῖται Θεός. Λύτὸς γὰρ ἐπόπτης ἁπάντων καὶ κριτῆς.
ou prosthēseis epʼ auto, oude apheleis apʼ hautou. Ol anthrōpoi hamartanontes genikǭ logǭ dichōs hamartanousin, ē ype r6ainontes tas entolas ē hypokenountes. Hotan gar mē apo epistēmēs politeuometha, mēde ginōskontes ta metra tēs dikaiosynēs sphallometha, kai esthʼ hote hyperbainontes ton ka;nona, phantasią tou poiein ti kreitton, ekpiptomen tou prokeimenou. Tou hautou. Ui oun mē poiountes panta, ē oi pleion ti poiountes, paranomoi. Pan ktēnos dichēloun hoplēn, kai anagon mērykismon. To men dichēlein epi tēs hoplēs, tēn poreian kathʼ hēn pros pan hotioun erchometha tōn agathōn sprydasmatōn emphaneieno ho de mērykismos, to anō te kai katō poiein tēs theopneustou Graphēs tous logous, kai hoion anamasasthai kai kataleptynein ereunais ta kekrymmena tōn theōrēmatōn. Panta hosa estin en autois pterygia kai,kepides, phagesthe. Tōn ptēnōn oimai hosa men skolopas echei katōterō tōn gonatōn hyper tas baseis kathara einai bouletai; hosa de mē, akatharta. Heortēn skēnōn poiēseis seautǭ hepta hēmeras. Heuriskomen en tais Graphais to onoma tēs heortēs kai tēs panēgyreōs, hōsper para tǭ prophētę̄ legonti i Ti poiēsete en hēmerą panēgyreōs kai en hēmerą heortēs Kyriou? i Zētēteon tēn diaphoran heortēs kai panēgyreōs. Pasa men oun, hinʼ houtōs eipō, hilara hēmera, en prostetaktai hōs en hagia tade tina para tas loipas poiein exaireta, heortē kaleitai; ou pasa de esti panēgyris, alla kata to onoma, hote epi to auto synathroizontai hoi pantachothen Hebraioi, hōste kata touto tēn men panēgyrin einai heortēn, ouketi de pantōs tēn heortēn panēgyrin ; hoion sabbata kai neomēniai, heortai eisino azyma de kai hai hēmerai tōn hebdomadōn kai skēnopēgiai ou monon hai heortai, alla kai panēgyreis, hote prostetaktai pan arsenikon phainesthai enōpion Kyriou tou theou sou eis ton topon hon an eklexētai. Ou metakinēseis horia tou plēsion sou. Plēsion pollachou pas anthrōpos eirētai. Tou hautou. yyte gar dei tous pelas pleonektein, oude tous tōn paterōn horous ōs kalōs pagentas parakeleuein. Touto gar aition pasēs synchyseōs estai, tōn ’men homorountōn hōs adikoumenōn, periphronoumenōn de tōn horisantōn. Plēsion de tines panta anthrōpon legousin. Ean de katastę̄ martys adikos kata anthrō-o pou. Tauta men ho nomos pros astheneis tous Israēlitas ho de Kyrios o tauta nomothetēsas tois heautou mathētais phēsin; i Ēkousate suggestu, Ophthalmon anti ophthalmou, i kai ta hexēs, i Egō de legō hymin, mē antistēnai tǭ ponērǭ. i Tou hautou. Tauta men epi aisthētou kai tōn kata kosmon, epi de tōn hēmartēmenōn hēmin, oudenos deitai Theos. Lytos gar epoptēs hapantōn kai kritēs.
[Deut 12:32] “You shall not add to it, nor take away from it.” People who sin, generally speaking, sin in two ways: either by exceeding the commandments or by falling short of them. For when we do not live by knowledge, nor know the measures of righteousness, we go wrong; and sometimes, exceeding the rule in the fancy of doing something better, we fall away from what is set before us. [Of the same.] Those, then, who do not do everything, or who do something more, are transgressors. [Deut 14:6] “Every animal that divides the hoof and chews the cud.” Dividing the hoof shows the course by which we come to all good pursuits whatever; chewing the cud is to turn over and over the words of the God-breathed Scripture and, as it were, to chew them again, and to grind fine by inquiry the hidden contemplations. [Deut 14:9] “All that have fins and scales you shall eat.” Of the winged creatures, I think, he wishes those to be clean which have shanks below the knees, above the feet; those that do not, unclean. [Deut 16:13] “You shall keep the feast of tabernacles for yourself seven days.” We find in the Scriptures the name of feast and that of festival assembly, as in the prophet who says, “What will you do on the day of assembly and on the day of the feast of the Lord?” We must seek the difference between feast and assembly. Every joyful day, so to speak, on which certain special things are commanded to be done, as on a holy day, beyond the rest, is called a feast. Not every one is an assembly, but, as the name says, when the Hebrews from everywhere gather together; so that in this sense the assembly is a feast, but a feast is not necessarily an assembly. For example, sabbaths and new moons are feasts; but unleavened bread, the days of weeks, and tabernacles are not only feasts but also assemblies, when every male is commanded to appear before the Lord your God in the place he chooses. [Deut 19:14] “You shall not move your neighbour's boundaries.” In many places every human being is called a neighbour. [Of the same.] For one must neither take advantage of those near nor disturb the boundaries of the fathers, which were well fixed. For this would be the cause of all confusion, the neighbours being wronged and those who fixed the boundaries despised. Some say that “neighbour” means every human being. [Deut 19:16] “And if an unjust witness rises against a man.” These things the law said to the weak Israelites; but the Lord who legislated them says to his own disciples: “You have heard that it was said, An eye for an eye,” and so on; “but I say to you, do not resist the evil one.” [Of the same.] These things concern what is perceptible and the affairs of the world; but with regard to our sins God needs no one, for he himself is the overseer and judge of all.
Chapter 809
809PG 12:809a–809d
Τίς ό ἅνθρωπος 0' φοβούμενος. '0 τοῖς γηΐνοις ἐγκείμενος καὶ οίκίαν οἰκοδομῶν, καὶ φυτεύων ἀμπελῶνας, ταῖς φιλοσαρκίαις ἡδονῶν ἡττώμενος, ἔσται πάντως δειλός τε καὶ ἄναλκις. Ἐὰν δέ τινι υἱὸς ἀπειθὴς Οὐχ ἀπλῶς βούλεταιάναιρεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς παραπικραίνοντας τοὺς γονείς· ἀλλʼ ὅταν ἀμφότεροι συμφωνήσωσιν οἱ γονεῖς κατὰ τοῦ παιδός. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἄν τε ὁ πατὴρ ὀργισθῇ, καὶ ἀνελεῖν ὁρμήσῃ τὸν υἱὸν, ἡ μήτηρ ἐπέχει· ἄν τε αὐτὴ παροξυνθῇ, ὁ πατὴρ οὐκ ἐᾷʼ, καὶ σπάνιον ἔσται συμφωνῆσαι τοὺς γονεῖς κατὰ τοῦ ίδίου αὐτῶν τέκνου, προστάττει ὁ Θεὸς, ὅταν ἀμφότεροι συμφωνήσωσι κατά τοῦ παιδὸς, τότε καταλεύειν αὐτὸν, οὐ τοὺς γεννήσαντας, ἀλλὰ τοὺς λοιπούς. Οὐ κατασπερεῒς τὸν ἀμπελῶνά σου διάφορον. Ἵνα μὴ ἀτονωτέρα γένηται ἡ γῆ, ὼς μήτε τὸ σπέρμα πλῆρες ἀποδιδόναι, μήτε τῆς ἀμπέλου τὸν καρο πδν, ἀλλὰ καθʼ ἑαυτοῦ ἕκαστον. Οὺκ ἀροτριάσεις ἐν μόσχῳ καὶ ὄνῳ ἐπὶ τὸ αὑτό. Τὸ γαῦρον τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ φιλόπονον τῷ φιληδόνῳ καὶ παθητικῷ μὴ συζεύξῃς. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ἡσαΐας δὲ πάλιν γράφει · ι Μακάριοι οἱ σπείροντες ἐπὶ πᾶν ὕδωρ. ι Ποῖον ὕδωρ, ἐφʼ ᾧ δεῖ σπείρειν τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα; Είη δὲ τοῦτο βάπτισμα τῆς σωτηρίας, τὸ λουτρὸν τῆς παλιγγενεσίας. Σπεῖρε ἐπὶ τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ λουτροῦ, καὶ γίνῃ μακάριος. Ἐκ;ἰ βοῦς καὶ ὄνος πατεῖ, βοῦς ὁ καθαρὸς ὁ Ἰσραηλίτης, καὶ ὄνος ἀκάθαρτος ὲκ γένους ὸ ἀπὸ τῶν ὲθνῶνο ἶνα σύ μβολον ἀμφότερα τὰ ζῶα τοῦ λόγου τοῦ τοῖς ἔθνεσι κεκηρυγμένον. Πατεί οὖν βοῦς καὶ ὄνος, φησὶ, τοῦτο τὸ ὕδωρ ὅπου σπείρειν θέλομεν. Ἐὰν δὲ γένηται παῖς παρθένος μεμνηστευ- “rw. ἀνδρί. Τ ὴν ἤδη μεμνηστευμένην γυναῖκα καὶεί οὕτω καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ τῆς θεοτόκου ἐλέχθη. Καὶ ἕως εὶς τὸν αἰῶνα. Ἐπειδὴ καὶ οὗτοι ὲκ πορνείας εἰσὶν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων τοῦ Λώτʼ οὐ μόνον δὲ ἕως γενεᾶς δεκάτης ἀδεκτοι τῇ συναγωγῇ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ εἰσιν, ἀλλά καὶ είς τὸν αἰῶνα. Οὕτω βούλεται αὐτοῖς τὴν ἔχθραν ἀΐδιον εἶναιʼ κατά μὲν τὸ νόημα καὶ τὴν ἀληθῆ αἰτίαν τῆς θείας Γραφῆς, ἐπειδὴ τὸν Βαλαὰμ ἐμισθώσαντο, ἐφʼ ᾧτε καταράσασθαι τοῖς Ἑβραίοις, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰς αὐτῶν γυναῖκας καὶ τάς θυγατέρας, ὅσαι ἦσαν ὡραῖαι τῇ ὄψει καὶ καλαὶ τῷ εῖδει, προέστησαν τοῦ γένους, ὥστε αὐτὰς δοῦναι πρὸς πορνείαν τοῖς Ἰσραηλίταις, καὶ πορνείαν διὰ τοῦτο χαλεπωτάτην προξενῆσαι τοῖς Ἐὅραίοιςο αὕτη δὲ ἦν τὸ ἀποστῆναι μὲν τοῦ Θεοῦ, τελεσθῆναι δὲ τῷ Βεελφεγὼρ· ὅπερ καὶ γέγονεν. Οὐκ ἑνεχιιράσεις μύλων· οὐδὲ ἐπιμύλιον. Ὅτι μονόλιθον, φησὶν, ἀδύνατον συντρίψαι τὸν σῖτον· δίδυμον γὰρ ἀρῤενόθηλυ κατασκευάζεται μύλος. Ἐπεὶ οὖν καὶ Ἰουδαῖοι μίαν διαθήκην ἔχουσιν· ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ πᾶσα αἵρεσις δοκοῦσα ταύτην τὴν καινὴν μόνην ἔχειν, οὐκ ἀλήθουσι ὲν τῷ μυλῶνι τούτῳ, ἵνα γεύσωνται τοῦ ἐπουρανίου ἄρτουο ἐὰν
Tis o hanthrōpos 0' phoboumenos. '0 tois gēïnois enkeimenos kai oikian oikodomōn, kai phyteuōn ampelōnas, tais philosarkiais hēdonōn hēttōmenos, estai pantōs deilos te kai analkis. Ean de tini huios apeithēs Ouch aplōs bouletaianaireisthai autous parapikrainontas tous goneis; allʼ hotan amphoteroi symphōnēsōsin hoi goneis kata tou paidos. Epeidē gar an te ho patēr orgisthę̄, kai anelein hormēsę̄ ton huion, hē mētēr epechei; an te autē paroxynthę̄, ho patēr ouk eąʼ, kai spanion estai symphōnēsai tous goneis kata tou idiou autōn teknou, prostattei ho Theos, hotan amphoteroi symphōnēsōsi kata tou paidos, tote kataleuein auton, ou tous gennēsantas, alla tous loipous. Ou kataspereïs ton ampelōna sou diaphoron. Hina mē atonōtera genētai hē gē, ōs mēte to sperma plēres apodidonai, mēte tēs ampelou ton karo pdn, alla kathʼ heautou hekaston. Ouk arotriaseis en moschǭ kai onǭ epi to hauto. To gauron tēs psychēs kai philoponon tǭ philēdonǭ kai pathētikǭ mē syzeuxę̄s. Tou autou. Hēsaïas de palin graphei ; i Makarioi hoi speirontes epi pan hydōr. i Poion hydōr, ephʼ hǭ dei speirein to kalon sperma? Eiē de touto baptisma tēs sōtērias, to loutron tēs palingenesias. Speire epi to mystērion tou loutrou, kai ginę̄ makarios. Ek?i bous kai onos patei, bous ho katharos ho Israēlitēs, kai onos akathartos ek genous o apo tōn ethnōno ina sy mbolon amphotera ta zōa tou logou tou tois ethnesi kekērygmenon. Patei oun bous kai onos, phēsi, touto to hydōr hopou speirein thelomen. Ean de genētai pais parthenos memnēsteu- “rw. andri. T ēn ēdē memnēsteumenēn gynaika kaiei houtō kai epi tou Iōsēph kai tēs theotokou elechthē. Kai heōs eis ton aiōna. Epeidē kai houtoi ek porneias eisin apo tōn thygaterōn tou Lōtʼ ou monon de heōs geneas dekatēs adektoi tę̄ synagōgę̄ tou Israēl eisin, alla kai eis ton aiōna. Houtō bouletai autois tēn echthran aïdion einaiʼ kata men to noēma kai tēn alēthē aitian tēs theias Graphēs, epeidē ton Balaam emisthōsanto, ephʼ hǭte katarasasthai tois Hebraiois, alla kai tas autōn gynaikas kai tas thygateras, hosai ēsan hōraiai tę̄ opsei kai kalai tǭ eidei, proestēsan tou genous, hōste autas dounai pros porneian tois Israēlitais, kai porneian dia touto chalepōtatēn proxenēsai tois Heoraioiso hautē de ēn to apostēnai men tou Theou, telesthēnai de tǭ Beelphegōr; hoper kai gegonen. Ouk henechiiraseis mylōn; oude epimylion. Hoti monolithon, phēsin, adynaton syntripsai ton siton; didymon gar arrenothēly kataskeuazetai mylos. Epei oun kai Ioudaioi mian diathēkēn echousin; homoiōs de kai pasa hairesis dokousa tautēn tēn kainēn monēn echein, ouk alēthousi en tǭ mylōni toutǭ, hina geusōntai tou epouraniou artouo ean
[Deut 20:8] “What man is fearful?” The one who is devoted to earthly things, building a house and planting vineyards, overcome by the pleasures of the flesh, will certainly be cowardly and weak. [Deut 21:18] “If anyone has a disobedient son.” He does not simply wish those who embitter their parents to be killed, but only when both parents agree against the child. For since, if the father is angry and rushes to kill the son, the mother restrains him, and if she is provoked, the father does not allow it, and it will be rare for the parents to agree against their own child, God commands that when both agree against the child, then he is to be stoned, not by those who begot him, but by the rest. [Deut 22:9] “You shall not sow your vineyard with a different seed.” So that the land may not become weaker, yielding neither the seed in full nor the fruit of the vine, but each by itself. [Deut 22:10] “You shall not plough with a calf and a donkey together.” Do not yoke the proud and toil-loving part of the soul with the pleasure-loving and passionate. [Of the same.] Isaiah again writes: “Blessed are those who sow by every water.” What water is it, beside which one must sow the good seed? It would be baptism of salvation, the washing of regeneration. Sow upon the mystery of the washing, and you become blessed. Where ox and donkey tread: the ox, the clean animal, is the Israelite, and the donkey, unclean by race, is the one from the Gentiles; so that both animals are a symbol of the word preached to the Gentiles. Ox and donkey, then, it says, tread this water where we wish to sow. [Deut 22:23] “If there is a virgin girl betrothed to a man.” He means the woman already betrothed; and so it was said also in the case of Joseph and the Mother of God. [Deut 23:3] “And even forever.” Since these too are born of sexual immorality, from Lot's daughters, they are excluded from the congregation of Israel not only until the tenth generation but forever. So he wishes their enmity to be eternal; according to the sense and the true reason of divine Scripture, because they hired Balaam to curse the Hebrews, and also set before the people their wives and daughters, as many as were fair to look upon and beautiful in form, so as to give them to the Israelites for immorality, and so to procure for the Hebrews the most grievous immorality: this was to depart from God and be initiated to Baal-peor, which indeed happened. [Deut 24:6] “You shall not take a mill nor an upper millstone in pledge.” Because it is impossible, he says, to grind grain with a single stone; for a mill is made double, male and female. Since, then, the Jews have one covenant, and likewise every heresy that thinks it has this new one only, they do not grind in this mill, so as to taste the heavenly bread. For if
Chapter 811
811PG 12:812a–812d
εἶθ γὰρ, φησὶ, μὴ συντριβῇ καὶ ἀληθῆ 6 σῖτος, ἄσιτοι μὲνουσιν. Ἐκ τούτου οὖν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁρμώμενος τὸν προκείμενον σαφηνίζω νόμον, ι Οὐκ ὲνεχυράσεις μύλον, ι τουτέστιν, οὐ μὴ βεβηλώσεις τὴν ’παλαιὰν καὶ οὺ μὴ ἀπώσεις αὐτὴν τῆς σῆς οἰκίας· ι οὐδὲ smptiλιον· ι ἀντὶ τοῦ, τὴν καινὴν, ι ὅτι ψυχὴν οὗτος ἐνεχυράζει, ι τουτέστι τούτοις τρέφεται ἠ ψυχὴ ἀποληύ. ουσα νοητῶν ἐδεσμάτων. Ἀριθμῷ τεσσαράκοντα μαστιγώσουσιν αὐτόν. Ἀεί γε τετηρήκαμεν κακωτικὸν ὄντα τὸν μʼ ἀριθμόν· ὅθεν Μωῦσῆς ό μέγας τεσσαράκοντα ἡμέρας νηστεύσας, καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον ὁ Ἠλίαςʼ ἀλλὰ καὶ 6 Σωτὴρ ἡμῶν πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου οὐκ ἔφα· γεν μʼ ἡμέρας καὶ μʼ νύκτας · καὶ 6 μέγας δὲ κατακλυσμὸς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς γίνεται, ῦοντος τοῦ Θεοῦ, τεσσαράκοντα ἡμέρας καὶ τεσσαράκοντα νύκτας. Οὐκ ἐπιβαλεῖς αὐτοῖς σίδηρον. Ζητητὲον διὰ τί σίδηρον οὐκ ea τῶν λίθων ἅψασθαι-είς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου χρησιμευὼτων. Ἀλλὰ καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα εἰς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τοῦ ναοῦ λίθους ἀπεο λεκήτους προστάττει συναγαγεῖν, καὶ οἰκοδομῆσαι. Εἰ γὰρ ἄτοπον τὸ σίδηρον ἅπτεσθαι τοῦ λίθου πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν ἁρμόττοντος, πῶς οῦν ἄρα οἱ κίονες. πῶς οῦν αἱ σανίδες καὶ αἱ τούτων κεφαλίδες είργάσθησαντ Ἦ πῶς ὅσα ἐκ χαλκοῦ γέγονεν ἢ χρυσοῦ ἢ ἀργύρρου, κατεσκευάσθη ἄρα ἄνευ σιδη ροῦ; Καὶ πῶς οἷόν τες Διὰ τούτων φανερὸν μὲν, ὅτι οὐχ ἁπλῶς ἀπαγορεύει τδ σίδηρον ἅψασθαι τῶν λίθων. Τίς οῦν ἡ αἰτία; Λέγομεν οὐ διῖσχυριξόμενοι. Ταῦτα δὴ τοίνυν. Σκληρὸν σκληρῷ ἐπιβάλλειν καὶ συγκρούειν κωλύει. Μεγάλα γὰρ φιλεί τίκτεσθαι κακὰ ὲκ τῆς τῶν σκληρῶν συμμίξεως καὶ συγκρούσεως. Ἦ τὸν φόνον ὡς πορρωτάτω τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐκβάλλει· καὶ μάλα δικαίως. El γὰρ ού χρὴ λίθῳ τῷ οἰκοδομουμένῳ είς τὴν τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου κατασκευὴν, ιῆ τοῦ ναοῦ, Οὗτοι στήσονται εὐλογεῖν τὸν λαόν. Παρατηρητέον ὅτι οἱ εὐλογεῖν ταχθέντες ἀπὸ τῶν ἐλευθέρων γυναικῶν καὶ συγγενῶν τοῦ Ἰακὼβ ἐγεννήθησαν οὕτω οί δὲ καταρᾶσθαι ἀφορισθέντες ἀπὸ τοῦ δρους Γεβὰλ, ἀπὸ τῶν παιδισκῶν ἦσαν, πλὴν τ-ῦ Ῥουβὶμ καὶ τοῦ Ζαβουλὼν. Τέτακται δὲ 6 Ῥουβὶμ μετὰ τῶν καταρωμένων, ὼς καὶ καταρώμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός. ΕΞ δὲ καὶτὸν Λευὶ κατηράσατο, ἀλλὰ λελύτρωται αὐτὸς τῇ,ἱερατικῇ ἀξίᾳ. Μάλιστα γὰρ ίερέως ἐστὶ τὸ τὸν λαὸν εὐλογεῖν. Ἀλλὰ καὶ 6 Συμεὼν -ὡς ὲν μέσῳ τῆς Ἰούδα φυλῆς οἰκήσας, καὶ ὥσπερ μέρος αὐτῆς γεγονὼς, διὰ τοῦτο ὅπου Ἰούδας, ἐκεῖ καὶ αὐτὸς ἀριθμεῖται. Καὶ αὕτηή εὐλογία ἣν ηὐλόγησε Μωϋσῆς. Al παρὰ Ἰακὼβ προρρήσεις, οῦτε πᾶσαι εὐλογίαι ἦσαν, οὔτε πᾶσαι ἀραί· al δὲ παρὰ Μωῦσέως, πᾶσαι ef)λογίαι. ιαι.:(al κατέσπευσεν ἐξ ὄρους Φαράν. Τουτέστι
eith gar, phēsi, mē syntribę̄ kai alēthē 6 sitos, asitoi menousin. Ek toutou oun kai autos hormōmenos ton prokeimenon saphēnizō nomon, i Ouk enechyraseis mylon, i toutestin, ou mē bebēlōseis tēn ’palaian kai ou mē apōseis autēn tēs sēs oikias; i oude smptilion; i anti tou, tēn kainēn, i hoti psychēn houtos enechyrazei, i toutesti toutois trephetai ē psychē apolēu. ousa noētōn edesmatōn. Arithmǭ tessarakonta mastigōsousin auton. Aei ge tetērēkamen kakōtikon onta ton mʼ arithmon; hothen Mōysēs o megas tessarakonta hēmeras nēsteusas, kai meta touton ho Ēliasʼ alla kai 6 Sōtēr hēmōn peirazomenos hypo tou diabolou ouk epha; gen mʼ hēmeras kai mʼ nyktas ; kai 6 megas de kataklysmos epi tēs gēs ginetai, yontos tou Theou, tessarakonta hēmeras kai tessarakonta nyktas. Ouk epibaleis autois sidēron. Zētēteon dia ti sidēron ouk ea tōn lithōn hapsasthai-eis tēn oikodomēn tou thysiastēriou chrēsimeuōtōn. Alla kai meta tauta eis tēn oikodomēn tou naou lithous apeo lekētous prostattei synagagein, kai oikodomēsai. Ei gar atopon to sidēron haptesthai tou lithou pros oikodomēn harmottontos, pōs oun ara hoi kiones. pōs oun hai sanides kai hai toutōn kephalides eirgasthēsant Ē pōs hosa ek chalkou gegonen ē chrysou ē argyrrou, kateskeuasthē ara aneu sidē rou? Kai pōs hoion tes Dia toutōn phaneron men, hoti ouch haplōs apagoreuei td sidēron hapsasthai tōn lithōn. Tis oun hē aitia? Legomen ou diischyrixomenoi. Tauta dē toinyn. Sklēron sklērǭ epiballein kai synkrouein kōlyei. Megala gar philei tiktesthai kaka ek tēs tōn sklērōn symmixeōs kai synkrouseōs. Ē ton phonon hōs porrōtatō tēs kardias tōn anthrōpōn ekballei; kai mala dikaiōs. El gar ou chrē lithǭ tǭ oikodomoumenǭ eis tēn tou thysiastēriou kataskeuēn, iē tou naou, Houtoi stēsontai eulogein ton laon. Paratērēteon hoti hoi eulogein tachthentes apo tōn eleutherōn gynaikōn kai syngenōn tou Iakōb egennēthēsan houtō oi de katarasthai aphoristhentes apo tou drous Gebal, apo tōn paidiskōn ēsan, plēn t-y Rhoubim kai tou Zaboulōn. Tetaktai de 6 Rhoubim meta tōn katarōmenōn, ōs kai katarōmenos hypo tou patros. EX de kaiton Leui katērasato, alla lelytrōtai autos tę̄,hieratikę̄ axią. Malista gar iereōs esti to ton laon eulogein. Alla kai 6 Symeōn -hōs en mesǭ tēs Iouda phylēs oikēsas, kai hōsper meros autēs gegonōs, dia touto hopou Ioudas, ekei kai autos arithmeitai. Kai hautēē eulogia hēn ēulogēse Mōÿsēs. Al para Iakōb prorrēseis, oute pasai eulogiai ēsan, oute pasai arai; al de para Mōyseōs, pasai ef)logiai. iai.:(al katespeusen ex orous Pharan. Toutesti
the grain, he says, is not crushed and ground, they remain without food. Starting from this, then, I myself too explain the present law, “You shall not take a mill in pledge”: that is, you shall not profane the old covenant nor thrust it out of your house; “nor the upper millstone,” in place of “the new”; “for this man takes a soul in pledge,” that is, by these the soul is nourished, enjoying intelligible foods. [Deut 25:3] “With forty stripes they shall beat him.” We have always observed that the number forty is one of affliction. Hence Moses the great fasted forty days, and after him Elijah; and our Saviour too, when he was tempted by the devil, did not eat for forty days and forty nights; and the great flood also came upon the earth when God rained forty days and forty nights. [Deut 27:5] “You shall not lift iron upon them.” We must ask why he does not allow iron to touch the stones used for building the altar. Afterwards too, for building the temple, he commands unhewn stones to be gathered and built. For if it is absurd for iron to touch stone suitable for building, how were the pillars made, how the boards and their capitals? Or how was everything made of bronze or gold or silver produced without iron? And how could it be? From this it is clear that he does not forbid iron to touch stones absolutely. What, then, is the reason? We say it without insisting. He forbids putting hard against hard and striking them together; for great evils tend to arise from the mixing and clashing of hard things. Or he casts murder as far as possible from the hearts of men; and very justly. For if it is not right that a stone being built into the construction of the altar or of the temple … [Deut 27:12] “These shall stand to bless the people.” It should be observed that those appointed to bless were born of Jacob's free wives, his kinswomen, while those set apart to curse from Mount Ebal were from the maidservants, except Reuben and Zebulun. Reuben is ranked with those who curse because he was cursed by his father. Jacob cursed Levi too, but Levi was redeemed by the priestly dignity; for it belongs above all to a priest to bless the people. And Simeon, since he dwelt in the midst of the tribe of Judah and became as it were part of it, is therefore counted where Judah is. [Deut 33:1] “And this is the blessing with which Moses blessed.” The predictions of Jacob were neither all blessings nor all curses; but those of Moses are all blessings. [Deut 33:2] “And he hastened from Mount Paran.” That is,
Chapter 813
813PG 12:813a–813d
τῷ μηκέτι τῷ Ἰσραὴλ χρηματίζειν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, καὶ τὸν νόμον ἔστησε. Τοῦτο γὰρ, ι κατέσπευσεν ἐξ ὄρους Φαρὰν, ι εἵτουν ι κατέπαυσεν.. ι ὅπερ ἑτέρα περιέχει γραφὴ, ἀντὶ τοῦ, σπουδαίως τὴν σκιὰν καταλείψει, καὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἡμῖν φανε- ’ ρώσει. Σὺν μυριάσι Κάδης. Νῦν Κάδης οὐ τὸν τόπον λέγει, ἀλλὰ τοὺς ἁγίους. Κάδης γὰρ τὸ ἅγιον λέγεται τῇ Ἐβραΐδι γλώττῃ. Καὶ ἐφείσατο τοῦ λαοῦ αὑτοῦ. Τουτέστιν, ἔσωσε παραγενόμενος τοὺς οῦ λαοὺς ποτὲ, νῦν δὲ λαοὺς Θεοῦ, τοὺς οὐκ ὴλεημένους, νῦν δὲ ὲλεηθέντας. ι Ἑν τούτῳ γὰρ, φησὶν ὁ ἀπόστολος Πέτρος, ἐφανερώθη · ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ὲν ἡμῖν. ι Καὶ ὁ ἅγιος Ἰωάννης λέγειιὲν τῇ καθολικῇ, ὅτι ι τὸν Υἰὸν αὑτοῦ η τὸν μονογενῆ ἀπέσταλκεν ὁ Θεὸς εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ἴνα ζήσωμεν διʼ αὐτοῦ. ι Καὶ ὁ μακάριος δὲ Παῦλός φησιν· ι "O γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο, ἀλλʼ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων» παρέδωκεν αὐτόν. ι Ἐφείσατο οῦν τοῦ Kal πάντες οἱ ἡγιασμένοι ὑπὸ τὰς χεῖράς σουέ Πάντων γὰρ κρατεῖ, ὡς βασιλεὺς οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς. Ὠς βασιλεί παριστάμενοι, ὼς Θεῷ λειτουργοῦντες, ὡς ποιητῇ προσκυνοῦντες, καὶ ὑπʼ αὐτόν εἰσιν· ι αὐτὸς γὰρ καὶ τὰ πάντα ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αυτου. Ι Συναχθέγτες ἄρχοντες λαῶν. Οἱ θεσπέσιος. μαθηταὶ, φησι καὶ ὁ Δαυὶδ ὲκ προσώπου αὐτῶν ι ’Υπὲταξε λαοὺς nmmum}. ἔθνη ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὴ μῶν. ι Καὶ πάλιν Ἄρχοντες λαῶν συνήχθησαν. μετὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ Ἁβραάμ. ι Τὴν κλῆσινοῦν δηλοῖ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὥς τοῦ Θεοῦ μέλλοντος ἄρξειν ὲν ταύτῷ καὶ τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ τῶν ἐθνῶν. ι Ἡγαπημένος ι δὲ λέγεται ὁ Υἱός. ‹ Οὗτοςιγάρ ἐστι, φησὶν, ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός. ι Καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἄρχει ἡμῶν ὁ Πατὴρ καὶ βα·σιλεύει..
tǭ mēketi tǭ Israēl chrēmatizein, alla tois ex ethnōn, kai ton nomon estēse. Touto gar, i katespeusen ex orous Pharan, i heitoun i katepausen.. i hoper hetera periechei graphē, anti tou, spoudaiōs tēn skian kataleipsei, kai tēn alētheian hēmin phane- ’ rōsei. Syn myriasi Kadēs. Nyn Kadēs ou ton topon legei, alla tous hagious. Kadēs gar to hagion legetai tę̄ Ebraïdi glōttę̄. Kai epheisato tou laou hautou. Toutestin, esōse paragenomenos tous ou laous pote, nyn de laous Theou, tous ouk ēleēmenous, nyn de eleēthentas. i Hen toutǭ gar, phēsin ho apostolos Petros, ephanerōthē ; agapē tou Theou en hēmin. i Kai ho hagios Iōannēs legeiien tę̄ katholikę̄, hoti i ton Uion hautou ē ton monogenē apestalken ho Theos eis ton kosmon, ina zēsōmen diʼ autou. i Kai ho makarios de Paulos phēsin; i "O ge tou idiou Huiou ouk epheisato, allʼ hyper hēmōn pantōn» paredōken auton. i Epheisato oun tou Kal pantes hoi hēgiasmenoi hypo tas cheiras soue Pantōn gar kratei, hōs basileus ouranou kai gēs. Ōs basilei paristamenoi, ōs Theǭ leitourgountes, hōs poiētę̄ proskynountes, kai hypʼ auton eisin; i autos gar kai ta panta hypetaxen hypo tous podas autou. I Synachthegtes archontes laōn. Hoi thespesios. mathētai, phēsi kai ho Dauid ek prosōpou autōn i ’Ypetaxe laous nmmum}. ethnē hypo tous podas ē mōn. i Kai palin Archontes laōn synēchthēsan. meta tou Theou Habraam. i Tēn klēsinoun dēloi tōn ethnōn, hōs tou Theou mellontos arxein en tautǭ kai tou Israēl kai tōn ethnōn. i Hēgapēmenos i de legetai ho Huios. ‹ Houtosigar esti, phēsin, ho Huios mou ho agapētos. i Kai dia touto archei hēmōn ho Patēr kai ba;sileuei..
by no longer giving oracles to Israel but to those from the Gentiles, and he established the law. For “he hastened from Mount Paran,” or “he rested,” which another reading has, stands for: he will earnestly leave the shadow and reveal the truth to us. “With myriads of Kadesh.” Here Kadesh does not mean the place but the saints; for “Kadesh” means “holy” in the Hebrew tongue. [Deut 33:3] “And he spared his people.” That is, when he came he saved those who were once not peoples but are now God's peoples, those once not shown mercy but now shown mercy. “For in this,” says the apostle Peter, “the love of God was manifested in us.” And holy John says in the catholic letter that “God has sent his only-begotten Son into the world, that we might live through him.” And the blessed Paul says, “He who did not spare his own Son, but gave him up for us all.” He spared, then, the … “And all the sanctified are under your hands.” For he rules all things, as king of heaven and earth. Standing before him as king, serving him as God, worshipping him as maker, they are also under him; “for he has put all things under his feet.” [Deut 33:5] “Rulers of peoples gathered together.” These are the divine disciples, in whose person David too says, “He subjected peoples to us, and nations under our feet”; and again, “Rulers of peoples gathered together with the God of Abraham.” It shows, then, the calling of the Gentiles, since God was to rule both Israel and the Gentiles together. And the Son is called “the beloved”: “This,” it says, “is my beloved Son.” And for this reason the Father rules and reigns over us.
Chapter 815
815PG 12:816a–816d
Σὺ, καὶ πᾶς ὁ λαὸς οὗτος. Τοῖς φυλάσσουσι τὸν νόμον ὑπέσχετο διδόναι ἃ. προείρηκενλ οὐ γὰρ Ἰησοῦ τῷ Ναυῆ. Μὴ φυλάξαντεςνγὰρ οι Ἰσραηλῖται ὀὐκ ἔλαβον, ὡς δηλοῖ τὰ έξῆς. Πᾶς ὁ τόπος ἐφʼ ᾦ ἂν ἐπιβῆτε. Ἀντέστησαν οι ἐπὶ τῆς Γατ διὰ τὴν τοῦ ’Δχὰρ παρανομίαν. Kal ἆλλως· Ὅτι τοῦ Θεοῦ παραδόντος εἰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν τὰ ἔθνη οὐκ ὲξωλόθρευσαν,καὶ ἐγενήθησαν, είς σκόλοπα αὐτοῖς. Kal εὶσήλθοσαν εις οὶκίαν γυναικὸς πόρνης, ᾖ ὄνομα Ῥαάβ. Πόρνῃ πιστεύουσιν οἱ κατάσκοποι τὴν ἑαυτῶν σωτηρίαν · καὶ μάλα εἰκότως. Δείκνυται γὰρ ὲξ ὧν ἡ πόρνη διαλέγεται, μόνη πιστὴ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν φοβουμένη· διὸ καὶ διʼ αὐτῆς ἡ συγγένεια σώζεται. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ῥαὰβ ἑρμηνεύεται πλατυσμὸς, σύμ.- 6ολον οὖσα τὴς ἀπὸ τῶν ὲθνῶν Ἐκκλησίας λεγούσης· ι Στενός μοι ὁ τόπος, ποίησόν μοι τόπον ἴνα οἰκήσω. ι Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Οὐκ ὲκ τῆς δεξιώσεως μόνης σώζεται, ἀλλὰ προηγουμένως ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως καὶ τῆς πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν διαθέσεως. Καὶ ἔκρυψεν αὐτοὺς ἐν τῇ λινοκαλάμῃ. Τοῖς ξύλοις αὐτοὺς ἔκρυψε τῆς λινοκαλὰμης οἷς εἶχεν ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος έτοιμάζουσα Δἔιργόιζεσθοιι τὴν βύσσον αὐτοῖς ὡς ἀξίοις οὖσιν ἐνδύματος ἀρχιερατικοῦ. Ἡ γὰρ λινοκαλάμη ποιεί τὴν βύσσον ἐξ ἦς τὸ ἱερατικὸν ἐνδυ μα γίνεται. Καὶ κατεχάλασεν αὐτοὺς διὰ τῆς θυρίδος. ’ἰστέον ὅτι ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς ἐν τῷ τείχει ἦν. Ἀδελφὰ τῆς παλαιᾶς τὰ νέα · ὅμοιον γάρ ὲστι τὸ ἐπὶ τοῦ Παύλου, ὅτε ὲχάλασαν αὑτὸν ὲν σαργάνῃ διὰ τοῦ τείχους. Τοῦ αὐτοῦ. Ὁ ’Λπόστολος δεύτερον ἐσώθη ἀπὸ τῶν ἐχθρῶν ὁμοιοτρόπως, ὥς φησιν έν τῇ δευτέρᾳ πρὸς Κορινθίους αὐτοῦ Ἐπιστολῇο ε Καὶ διὰ θυρίδος ὲν σαργάνῃ ἐχαλάσθην διὰ τοῦ τείχους, καὶ ἐξέφυγον. ι Πάλιν ὲν ταῖς Πράξεσιθ ε Παρετηροῦντο δὲ καὶ τὰς πύλας ἡμέρας καὶ νυκ-τὸς,ὅπως αὑτὸν ὰνέλωσιʼ λαβόντες es oi μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ νυκτὸς, τοῦ τείχους καθῆκαν αὑτὸν, χαλάσαντες ἐν σπυρίδι. ι Kal κατέμειναν· ἐκεῖ τρεῖς ἡμέρας. Οὐχ ὄτι τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἦν ἡ ὁδός · πάνυ γὰρ πλησίον ὁ Ἰορδάνης
Sy, kai pas ho laos houtos. Tois phylassousi ton nomon hypescheto didonai ha. proeirēkenl ou gar Iēsou tǭ Nauē. Mē phylaxantesngar oi Israēlitai ouk elabon, hōs dēloi ta exēs. Pas ho topos ephʼ ǭ an epibēte. Antestēsan oi epi tēs Gat dia tēn tou ’Dchar paranomian. Kal allōs; Hoti tou Theou paradontos eis cheiras autōn ta ethnē ouk exōlothreusan,kai egenēthēsan, eis skolopa autois. Kal eisēlthosan eis oikian gynaikos pornēs, ę̄ onoma Rhaab. Pornę̄ pisteuousin hoi kataskopoi tēn heautōn sōtērian ; kai mala eikotōs. Deiknytai gar ex hōn hē pornē dialegetai, monē pistē kai ton Theon phoboumenē; dio kai diʼ autēs hē syngeneia sōzetai. Tou autou. Rhaab hermēneuetai platysmos, sym.- 6olon ousa tēs apo tōn ethnōn Ekklēsias legousēs; i Stenos moi ho topos, poiēson moi topon ina oikēsō. i Tou autou. Ouk ek tēs dexiōseōs monēs sōzetai, alla proēgoumenōs apo tēs pisteōs kai tēs pros ton Theon diatheseōs. Kai ekrypsen autous en tę̄ linokalamę̄. Tois xylois autous ekrypse tēs linokalamēs hois eichen epi tou dōmatos etoimazousa Deirgoizesthoii tēn bysson autois hōs axiois ousin endymatos archieratikou. Hē gar linokalamē poiei tēn bysson ex ēs to hieratikon endy ma ginetai. Kai katechalasen autous dia tēs thyridos. ’isteon hoti ho oikos autēs en tǭ teichei ēn. Adelpha tēs palaias ta nea ; homoion gar esti to epi tou Paulou, hote echalasan hauton en sarganę̄ dia tou teichous. Tou autou. Ho ’Lpostolos deuteron esōthē apo tōn echthrōn homoiotropōs, hōs phēsin en tę̄ deuterą pros Korinthious autou Epistolę̄o e Kai dia thyridos en sarganę̄ echalasthēn dia tou teichous, kai exephygon. i Palin en tais Praxesith e Paretērounto de kai tas pylas hēmeras kai nyk-tos,hopōs hauton anelōsiʼ labontes es oi mathētai autou nyktos, tou teichous kathēkan hauton, chalasantes en spyridi. i Kal katemeinan; ekei treis hēmeras. Ouch oti triōn hēmerōn ēn hē hodos ; pany gar plēsion ho Iordanēs
[Josh 1:2] “You, and all this people.” He promised to give what he had foretold to those who keep the law, not to Joshua son of Nun; for the Israelites did not keep it and did not receive it, as what follows shows. [Josh 1:3] “Every place on which you tread.” The people of Ai resisted because of Achar's transgression. And in another way: because, when God had delivered the nations into their hands, they did not destroy them utterly, and these became a thorn to them. [Josh 2:1] “And they went into the house of a harlot, whose name was Rahab.” The spies entrust their safety to a harlot, and very fittingly; for it is shown from what the harlot says that she alone was faithful and feared God; therefore her kindred too is saved through her. [Of the same.] Rahab is interpreted “broadening,” being a symbol of the church from the Gentiles, which says, “The place is narrow for me; make room for me that I may dwell.” [Of the same.] She is saved not by her hospitality alone, but first of all by her faith and her disposition toward God. [Josh 2:6] “And she hid them in the flax stalks.” She hid them among the stalks of flax which she had on the roof, preparing to work the fine linen for them, as being worthy of high-priestly clothing; for flax produces the fine linen from which the priestly garment is made. [Josh 2:15] “And she let them down through the window.” One must know that her house was in the wall. The new things are sisters of the old; for what happened to Paul is similar, when they let him down in a basket through the wall. [Of the same.] The Apostle was saved a second time from his enemies in the same way, as he says in his second letter to the Corinthians: “And through a window in a basket I was let down through the wall and escaped.” Again in the Acts: “They were watching the gates day and night in order to kill him; but his disciples took him by night and let him down through the wall, lowering him in a basket.” [Josh 2:22] “And they stayed there three days.” Not that the road was three days long, for the Jordan is very near
Chapter 817
817PG 12:817a–817d
τῆς Ἰεριχὼ, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν τῶν κατασκόπων.4 ἀκριβῆ ἐξέτασιν. ι Ἐζήτησαν γὰρ, φησιν, οἱ καταδιώκοντες πάσας τὰς ὁδοὺς, καὶ οὐχ εῦρον. ι -4 Τετράκις μύριοι εὔζωνοι. Σημειωτέον ὅτιὴ τετρὰς, εἴτε μονάδων, εἴτε ἐκατοντόιδων, εἴτε ἐτέρου πλείονος ἀριθμοῦ, ἐπὶ κακώσεως κεῖται. Ποίησόν σοι μαχαίρας πετρίνας ἐκ πέτρας ἀκροτόμονυ. Ζητητέον διὰ τί οὐ πε ριετμήθησαν οἱ ἐν τῇ ἐρῆμῳ τεχθέντεςο ἢ διὰ τί τῷ Σαββάτῳ τις ξύλα συλλέξας ἐπὶ Μωῦσέως ἐκ προστάγματος Θεοῦ λιθόλευστος γέγονε. Τοσοῦτον δὲ πλῆθος ἀπερίτμητον μεμενηκὸς ἐντῇ ἐρήμῳ οὐδὲ ἐμέμφθη, καίτοι τοῦ Θεοῦ μὲν ἀποφηναμένου ἐξολοθρεύεσθαι τὴν ψυχὴν τὴν μὴ περιτμημένην τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ὀγδόῃ, οὐκέτι δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν παραβαινόντων τὸ Σάββατον τοῦτο ὡρίσαντος. Ἤδη μὲν οῦν καὶ αὐτόθεν εὔδηλον, ὅτι περιτομὴ καὶ Σάββατον οὐκ αὐτὰ καθʼ ἑαυτὰ καλὰ, ἀλλὰ ἐπειδὴ πρὸς καιρὸν ἐχρησίμευσεν. ’ἰστέον δέ ὅτι σημείου χάριν διᾶ τῆς, περιτομῆς ἐβουλήθη γνωρίζεσθαι, καὶ οῦκ ἀνασχομένους ἀπὸ πίστεως φαίνεσθαι, ὡς πρόβατα ἄλογα τῷ καυτῆρι κᾶν πλανηθῇ, ῥᾳδίαν ἔχει τὴν ἑαυτοῦ εὕρεσιν· οῦτω τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἐπιμιγνυμένους τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπὸ τῆς περιτομῆς φανεροὺς εἶναι βουληθείς. Καὶ τούτου ἀπόδειξις τὸ ἐν μὲν τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ περιτέμνεσθαι αὐτοὺς, ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἐπειδὴ μόνοι ἦσαν καὶ Αἰγυπτίων κεχωρισμένοι καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν τῶν κατὰ Παλαιστίνην, ἁπεριτμήτους μεμενηκέναι. Ὅτε δὲ παρελθόντες τὸν Ἰορδάνην ἔμελλον ἐν μέσῳ νʼ* ’- ""r""""v ν-- *1”- ι ι ι. εἶναι τῶν ἐθνῶν, αὖθις προσετάχθησαν περιτμηθῆναι. Διόπερ ἐκ δευτέρου εἶπεν, ὅτι οὐκ όκταημέρους περιετέμνοντο, ἀλλʼ ἀνδροθέντας ῆδη, καὶ πρὸς γῆράς τινας νενευκότας. Ἡ δὲ πετρίνη μάχαιρα τὸν Κύριον ἡμῖν δηλοῖ τὸν τὴν νοητὴν δόντα ἡμῖν περιτομὴν, τὴν εἰς νοῦν καὶ καρδίαν. Διὸ. τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ ὁ Ἀπόστολος ἡμῖν ἔλεγε περιτομὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ, οὐκ ἐν τῇ ἀπεκδύσει τῆς σαρκὸς ἠ μῶν. Ἐγὼ ἀρχιστράτηγος τῆς δυνάμεως Κυρίου, νῦν παραγέγονα. Μεμνῆσθαι ’δεῖ ὅτι ἡνίκα ἐμοσχοποίησαν. ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Μωῦσεῖ φησιν,ὃτι ι ’Δνάγαγε τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, οὑ γὰρ μὴ συναναβὦ διὰ τὸ τὸν λαδν σκληροτράχηλον εἶναι. Καὶ ἰδοὺ ἀποστελῶ τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ προσώπου σου. Πρόσεχε οὖν σεαυτῷ, καὶ μὴ ἁπείθει. ι ’0δέ Μωῦσῆς πρὸς αὐτόν φησιν· ι Εἰ μὴ συνανέρχῃ ἡμῖν, μή με ἀναγάγῃς ἐντεῦθεν. ι Καὶ τοῦτο εἰπὼν ἔπεισε ° mi. ἦν μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ, ἕως τῆς τελευτῆς Μωῦσῆ. Μετὰ δέ τὴν,τούτου ἀποβίωσιν, φαίνεται μὲν καὶ διαλέγεται τῷ τοῦ Ναυῆ Ἰησοῦ. Μετὰ γοῦν τὴν ἐπιστασίαν τοῦ λαοῦ εἰς τὸν μαθητὴν Μωῡσέως λοιπὸν παραδίδωσιν αὑτὸν τῷ ἁρχιστρατήγῳ τῷ Μιχαὴλ. Οὗτος ἦν ἄρχων τοῦ λαοῦ, ώς ἐν τῷ Δανιὴλ φαίνεται λέγων ἕτερος ἅγγελος. Πυρευόμενοι καὶ σαλπίζοντες. Aerati αἱ σάλπιγγες, σύμβολόν εἱσι τῶν ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. ι Αὐτὸς γὰρ, φησὶν, ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ καταβήσεται ἀπʼ
tēs Ierichō, alla dia tēn tōn kataskopōn.4 akribē exetasin. i Ezētēsan gar, phēsin, hoi katadiōkontes pasas tas hodous, kai ouch euron. i -4 Tetrakis myrioi euzōnoi. Sēmeiōteon hotiē tetras, eite monadōn, eite ekatontoidōn, eite eterou pleionos arithmou, epi kakōseōs keitai. Poiēson soi machairas petrinas ek petras akrotomony. Zētēteon dia ti ou pe rietmēthēsan hoi en tę̄ erēmǭ techthenteso ē dia ti tǭ Sabbatǭ tis xyla syllexas epi Mōyseōs ek prostagmatos Theou litholeustos gegone. Tosouton de plēthos aperitmēton memenēkos entę̄ erēmǭ oude ememphthē, kaitoi tou Theou men apophēnamenou exolothreuesthai tēn psychēn tēn mē peritmēmenēn tę̄ hēmerą tę̄ ogdoę̄, ouketi de epi tōn parabainontōn to Sabbaton touto hōrisantos. Ēdē men oun kai autothen eudēlon, hoti peritomē kai Sabbaton ouk auta kathʼ heauta kala, alla epeidē pros kairon echrēsimeusen. ’isteon de hoti sēmeiou charin dia tēs, peritomēs eboulēthē gnōrizesthai, kai ouk anaschomenous apo pisteōs phainesthai, hōs probata aloga tǭ kautēri kan planēthę̄, rhądian echei tēn heautou heuresin; outō tous Ioudaious epimignymenous tois ethnesin apo tēs peritomēs phanerous einai boulētheis. Kai toutou apodeixis to en men tę̄ Aigyptǭ peritemnesthai autous, en de tę̄ erēmǭ, epeidē monoi ēsan kai Aigyptiōn kechōrismenoi kai tōn allōn ethnōn tōn kata Palaistinēn, haperitmētous memenēkenai. Hote de parelthontes ton Iordanēn emellon en mesǭ nʼ* ’- ""r""""v n-- *1”- i i i. einai tōn ethnōn, authis prosetachthēsan peritmēthēnai. Dioper ek deuterou eipen, hoti ouk oktaēmerous perietemnonto, allʼ androthentas ēdē, kai pros gēras tinas neneukotas. Hē de petrinē machaira ton Kyrion hēmin dēloi ton tēn noētēn donta hēmin peritomēn, tēn eis noun kai kardian. Dio. touto gar kai ho Apostolos hēmin elege peritomēn tou Christou, ouk en tę̄ apekdysei tēs sarkos ē mōn. Egō archistratēgos tēs dynameōs Kyriou, nyn paragegona. Memnēsthai ’dei hoti hēnika emoschopoiēsan. ho Theos tǭ Mōysei phēsin,hoti i ’Dnagage ton laon touton, hou gar mē synanabō dia to ton ladn sklērotrachēlon einai. Kai idou apostelō ton angelon mou pro prosōpou sou. Proseche oun seautǭ, kai mē hapeithei. i ’0de Mōysēs pros auton phēsin; i Ei mē synanerchę̄ hēmin, mē me anagagę̄s enteuthen. i Kai touto eipōn epeise ° mi. ēn meta tou laou, heōs tēs teleutēs Mōysē. Meta de tēn,toutou apobiōsin, phainetai men kai dialegetai tǭ tou Nauē Iēsou. Meta goun tēn epistasian tou laou eis ton mathētēn Mōyseōs loipon paradidōsin hauton tǭ harchistratēgǭ tǭ Michaēl. Houtos ēn archōn tou laou, ōs en tǭ Daniēl phainetai legōn heteros hangelos. Pyreuomenoi kai salpizontes. Aerati hai salpinges, symbolon heisi tōn en tę̄ eschatę̄ hēmerą. i Autos gar, phēsin, ho Kyrios en keleusmati, en phōnę̄ archangelou, kai en salpingi Theou katabēsetai apʼ
Jericho; but because of the careful search for the spies: “For the pursuers,” it says, “searched all the roads and did not find them.” [Josh 4:13] “Forty thousand light-armed.” It should be noted that the number four, whether of units, of hundreds, or of some greater number, stands for affliction. [Josh 5:2] “Make for yourself knives of stone from sharp rock.” We must ask why those born in the desert were not circumcised; or why, under Moses, someone who gathered wood on the Sabbath was stoned by God's command, while so great a multitude that remained uncircumcised in the desert was not even blamed, although God had declared that the soul not circumcised on the eighth day should be destroyed, and had made no such decree about those who transgressed the Sabbath. From this, then, it is already quite clear that circumcision and the Sabbath are not good in themselves, but because they were useful for a time. One must know that he wished them to be known by circumcision as by a sign, and not to appear to have departed from the faith; just as irrational sheep marked by the branding iron, even if one strays, are easily found again; so he wished the Jews, when they mixed with the Gentiles, to be recognizable by circumcision. A proof of this is that in Egypt they were circumcised, but in the desert, since they were alone and separated from the Egyptians and from the other nations of Palestine, they remained uncircumcised. When, having crossed the Jordan, they were about to be in the midst of the nations, they were again commanded to be circumcised. Therefore he said “a second time,” since they were circumcised not at eight days old but as grown men, and some as they were nearing old age. The stone knife shows us the Lord, who gave us the intelligible circumcision, that of mind and heart. For this reason the Apostle too spoke to us of the circumcision of Christ, in the putting off of the body of our flesh. [Josh 5:14] “I, the chief captain of the power of the Lord, have now come.” One must remember that when they made the calf, God said to Moses: “Lead this people up, for I will not go up with you, because the people is stiff-necked. And behold, I will send my angel before your face. Take heed to yourself, then, and do not disobey.” And Moses said to him, “If you do not go up with us, do not lead me up from here.” By saying this he persuaded him, and God was with the people until the death of Moses. After his death he appears and speaks to Joshua son of Nun. After the leadership of the people passed to Moses' disciple, then, he hands the people over to the chief captain Michael. This angel was ruler of the people, as appears in Daniel, where another angel says so. [Josh 6:20] “Blowing the trumpets.” The trumpets are a symbol of the things of the last day: “For the Lord himself,” it says, “will descend from heaven with a command, with the voice of an archangel, and with the trumpet of God,” from
Chapter 827
827PG 12:828a–828d
σαι (δυνηθεὶς μᾶλλον θςιτέροιί, circa κᾳὶ καθαρώτερος γὲνόμεγὸς. δέὶλούστὲς sipo}. γῆς inopiae, μὴ incivilia} ἐῖναί τὴν γνῶσιν ’.ἐπει οἱ μὲν τὸ Actia—pa. τῷν [pugnae τὰς λέξεις καὶ κτὰ ὀνόματαλξςαθᾴπερ τὸ( σῶμά τὸ Μωῦσέως προσβλέποξδσιν ' οἱ se, ῖὰς διανοίας iui. τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων δηλούμενα διορῶσι, τὸν μετὰ ἀγγέλωνΜωῦσέσί πολυπραγμρνοῦντες.
sai (dynētheis mallon thsiteroii, circa kąi katharōteros genomegos. deiloustes sipo}. gēs inopiae, mē incivilia} einai tēn gnōsin ’.epei hoi men to Actia—pa. tǭn [pugnae tas lexeis kai kta onomatalxsathąper to( sōma to Mōyseōs prosblepoxdsin ' hoi se, ias dianoias iui. ta hypo tōn onomatōn dēloumena diorōsi, ton meta angelōnMōysesi polypragmrnountes.
… having become able to look rather on more divine things and having become purer, showing … that knowledge is not … ; since some look at the letter of the words and at the names, as at the body of Moses, while others discern the meanings and the things signified by the names, inquiring into the Moses who is with the angels.
Chapter 911
911PG 12:911a–911d
Ἐκ τςῖιν ᾮρέγένοιξς εζς τὸ]ρ Ἰησοῦνᾼεὸν Ναυῆ. τ ’Ajro τῆς κς ὁμιλίας τῶν sic τὸν Ἰησοῦν tor Ναυῆ, κερ. ιεʼ. 'H μὲν ἄκρα ὠφέλεια ἀπὸ τῶν τοιούτων ἀναγνωσμάτων τῷ δυναμένῳ νοῆσαι τὴν ἀληθῆ κληροδοσίαν ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ μεριζομένην τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ γίνεται, καὶ τῷ οἴῳ τε γενομένῳ ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν ἁγίαν, τὴν ἀληθινὴν, τὴν ὅντως ἀγαθὴν, καὶ ἐφαρμόσαι ἐκ τῆς ὀνομασίας τῶν εἰρημένων τῇ διαφορᾷ τῶν κληρονομούντων τὰ κατὰ τοὺς τόπους λεοτῷν τοιούτων ἀναγνωσμάτων. Et mox: BouMpeba παραμυθήσασθαι τοὺξ ἀκούοντας
Ek tsiin Ǭregenoixs ezs to]r IēsounĄeon Nauē. t ’Ajro tēs ks homilias tōn sic ton Iēsoun tor Nauē, ker. ieʼ. 'H men akra ōpheleia apo tōn toioutōn anagnōsmatōn tǭ dynamenǭ noēsai tēn alēthē klērodosian apo Iēsou merizomenēn tois huiois Israēl ginetai, kai tǭ oiǭ te genomenǭ anabēnai epi tēn gēn tēn hagian, tēn alēthinēn, tēn hontōs agathēn, kai epharmosai ek tēs onomasias tōn eirēmenōn tę̄ diaphorą tōn klēronomountōn ta kata tous topous leotǭn toioutōn anagnōsmatōn. Et mox: BouMpeba paramythēsasthai toux akouontas
[From the works of Origen on Joshua son of Nun. From the twentieth homily on Joshua son of Nun.] The highest benefit from such readings comes to one who is able to understand the true distribution of lots made by Jesus to the sons of Israel, and to one who has become able to go up to the holy land, the true land, the land that is truly good, and to fit what is said about the places, from the names of the places mentioned, to the differences among those who inherit … such readings. [And soon after:] We wish to encourage the hearers
Chapter 913
913PG 12:914a–914d
γόμενα · ἐπεὶ δὲ δύσκολόν ἐστιν εὑρεῖν τὸν οὖτωςώφερ λούμενον, βουλόμεθα παραμυθήσασθαι τοὺς ἀκούοντας μὴ ἐκκακεῖν ἐπὶ ταῖς ἀναγνώσεσι. Τίς οῦν ἠ παραμυθία ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ ὲκκακεῖν τὸν ἀκούοντα τῶν τοιούτων ἀναγνωσμάτων, λεκτέονʼ ῶσπερ τοίνυν αἱ ἐπῳδαὶ δύναμίν τινα ἔχουσι φυσικὴν, καὶ μὴ νοῶν ό κατεπᾳδόμενος λαμβάνει τι ὲκ τῆς ἐπῳδῆς, κατά τὴν φύσιν τῶν φθόγγων τῆς ἐπῳδῆς, εἴτε είς βλάβην, εἴτε εἰς ἴασιν σώματος ἢ ψυχῆς ἑαυτοῦ, οὕτω μοι νόει πάι σης ἐπῳδῆς δυνατωτέραν εἶναι τὴν σημασίαν τῶν tv ταῖς θείαις Γραφαῖς ὀνομάτωνο eici γάρ τινες δυνάμεις ὲν ἡμῖν ὧν αἱ μὲν κρείττονες διὰ τούτων τῶν οἱονεὶ ἐπῳδῶν τρέφονται, συγγενεῖς οὖσαι αὑταῖς, καὶ ἡμῶν μὴ νοούντων ὲκείνας τὰς δυνάμεις νοούσας τὰ λεγόμενα, δυνατωτέρας tv ἡμῖν γίνεσθαι πρὸς τὸ συνεργεῖν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ βίῳ· ὅτι γάρ ὲστί τινα ὲν ἡμῖν ἀόρατα, καὶ πολλά γε ταῦτα, δηλώσει ὁ είπών ψαλμός ι Εὐλόγει, ἡ ψυχή μου, τὸν Κύριον, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐντός μου τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ἅγιον αύτοῦ.›“Έστιν οῦν πλῆθός τι ὲν ἡμῖν δυνάμεων κεκλη ρωμένων ἡ μῶν τὰς ψυχὰς καὶ τὰ σώματα, αἵτινες ἐὰν ὦσιν ἅγιαι, τῆς Γραφῆς ἀναγινωσκομένης ὠφελοῦνται καὶ γίνονται ἰσχυρότεραι ’ κᾶν ὁ νοῦς ἡ μῶν ἄκαρπος ᾗ, ὠς γέγραπται πε pi τοῦ γλώσσῃ λαλοῦντος, «Ὄτιτὸ πνεῦμά μου προσεύχεται, ὁ δὲ νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστι, ι Νόει οὖν μοι ὄτι ποτε τοῦ ὲν ἡμῖν νοῦ ἀκάρπου ὄντος, αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ συνεργοῦσαι τῇ ψυχῇ καὶ τῷ νῷ, καὶ πᾶσιν ἡμῖν, τρέφονται λογικῇ τῇ ἀπὸ τῶν ἱερῶν γραμμάτων καί τῶν ὀνομάτων τούτων τροφῇ, καὶ τρεφόμεναι γίνονται δυνατώτεραι πρὸς τὸ ἡμῖν συνεργεῖν ο ὥσπερ δὲ αί κρείττους δυνάμεις οἱονεὶ κατεπᾴδονται καὶ ὠφελοῦνται, καὶ γίνονται δυνατώτεραι ἀπὸ τῶν τοιούτων γραμμάτων καὶ ὀνομάτων, οὕτως αἱ ἁντικείμεναι τῶν tv ἡμῖν δυνάμεων οἱονεὶ καθέλκονται καὶ νικῶνται ἀπὸ τῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπῳδῶν, καὶ νικώμεναι κοιμίζονται. Καὶ εἴποτέ τις ἡμῶν ἑώρακεν ἀπὸ ἐπῳδῶν ἀσπίδα κοιμιςομένην, ἢ ἄλλο τι τούτων τῶν ἰοβόλων, έκεῖνο παράδειγμα λαβέτω εἰς τὴν Γραφὴν, ἧς ἀναγινωσκομένης καὶ μὴ νοουμένης, ἐνίοτε ἀκηδιᾷ καὶ έκκακεῖ ὁ ἀκροατὴς, καὶ πιστευέτω ὅτι αἱ tv αύτῷ ἀσπίδες, καὶ αἱ ὲν αὑτῷ ἔχιδναι ἀτονώτεραι γίνονται ἀπὸ τῶν φαρμάκων τῶν φαρμακευόντων, οἷον παρά σοφοῦ Μωσῆ, παρά σοφοῦ Ἰησοῦ, παρά σοφῶν τῶν ἀγίων προφητῶν. Μὴ ὲκκακῶμεν οὖν ἀκούοντες Γραφῶν, ἃς ού νοοῦμεν, ἀλλά γενηθήτω ἡμῖν κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ἡμῶν, ἢν καὶ πιστεύομεν, ὅτι (πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος οὖσα, ὠφέλιμός ἐστι· ι τὸ γὰρ ἓν τῶν δύο δεῖ σε παραδέο ξασθαι ἐπὶ τούτων τῶν Γραφῶν, ἢ ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶ θεόπνευστοι, ἐπεὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν ὠφέλιμοι, ὠς ὑπολαμβάνοι ἂν ὁ ἄπιστος, ἢ ὠς πιστὸς παραδέξασθαι, ὅτι ὲπεί εἰσιν ὠφέλιμοι, θεόπνευστοί εἰσιν· ἰστέον μέντοιγε ὅτι καὶ ἀνεπαισθήτως ἡμῶν πολλάκις γίνεταιή ὠφέλεια, οἷον πολλάκις τροφήν τινα διατασσόμεθα ἐσθίειν,
gomena ; epei de dyskolon estin heurein ton outōsōpher loumenon, boulometha paramythēsasthai tous akouontas mē ekkakein epi tais anagnōsesi. Tis oun ē paramythia hyper tou mē ekkakein ton akouonta tōn toioutōn anagnōsmatōn, lekteonʼ ōsper toinyn hai epǭdai dynamin tina echousi physikēn, kai mē noōn o katepądomenos lambanei ti ek tēs epǭdēs, kata tēn physin tōn phthongōn tēs epǭdēs, eite eis blabēn, eite eis iasin sōmatos ē psychēs heautou, houtō moi noei pai sēs epǭdēs dynatōteran einai tēn sēmasian tōn tv tais theiais Graphais onomatōno eici gar tines dynameis en hēmin hōn hai men kreittones dia toutōn tōn hoionei epǭdōn trephontai, syngeneis ousai hautais, kai hēmōn mē noountōn ekeinas tas dynameis noousas ta legomena, dynatōteras tv hēmin ginesthai pros to synergein tǭ hēmeterǭ biǭ; hoti gar esti tina en hēmin aorata, kai polla ge tauta, dēlōsei ho eipōn psalmos i Eulogei, hē psychē mou, ton Kyrion, kai panta ta entos mou to onoma to hagion autou.›“Estin oun plēthos ti en hēmin dynameōn keklē rōmenōn hē mōn tas psychas kai ta sōmata, haitines ean ōsin hagiai, tēs Graphēs anaginōskomenēs ōphelountai kai ginontai ischyroterai ’ kan ho nous hē mōn akarpos hę̄, ōs gegraptai pe pi tou glōssę̄ lalountos, «Otito pneuma mou proseuchetai, ho de nous mou akarpos esti, i Noei oun moi oti pote tou en hēmin nou akarpou ontos, hai dynameis hai synergousai tę̄ psychę̄ kai tǭ nǭ, kai pasin hēmin, trephontai logikę̄ tę̄ apo tōn hierōn grammatōn kai tōn onomatōn toutōn trophę̄, kai trephomenai ginontai dynatōterai pros to hēmin synergein o hōsper de ai kreittous dynameis hoionei katepądontai kai ōphelountai, kai ginontai dynatōterai apo tōn toioutōn grammatōn kai onomatōn, houtōs hai hantikeimenai tōn tv hēmin dynameōn hoionei kathelkontai kai nikōntai apo tōn tou Theou epǭdōn, kai nikōmenai koimizontai. Kai eipote tis hēmōn heōraken apo epǭdōn aspida koimisomenēn, ē allo ti toutōn tōn iobolōn, ekeino paradeigma labetō eis tēn Graphēn, hēs anaginōskomenēs kai mē nooumenēs, eniote akēdią kai ekkakei ho akroatēs, kai pisteuetō hoti hai tv autǭ aspides, kai hai en hautǭ echidnai atonōterai ginontai apo tōn pharmakōn tōn pharmakeuontōn, hoion para sophou Mōsē, para sophou Iēsou, para sophōn tōn agiōn prophētōn. Mē ekkakōmen oun akouontes Graphōn, has ou nooumen, alla genēthētō hēmin kata tēn pistin hēmōn, ēn kai pisteuomen, hoti (pasa Graphē theopneustos ousa, ōphelimos esti; i to gar hen tōn dyo dei se paradeo xasthai epi toutōn tōn Graphōn, ē hoti ouk eisi theopneustoi, epei ouk eisin ōphelimoi, ōs hypolambanoi an ho apistos, ē ōs pistos paradexasthai, hoti epei eisin ōphelimoi, theopneustoi eisin; isteon mentoige hoti kai anepaisthētōs hēmōn pollakis ginetaiē ōpheleia, hoion pollakis trophēn tina diatassometha esthiein,
what is said. But since it is hard to find one who is so benefited, we wish to encourage the hearers not to lose heart at the readings. What, then, is the encouragement, so that the hearer of such readings may not lose heart? It must be said. Just as incantations have a certain natural power, and the one who is being enchanted, without understanding, receives something from the incantation according to the nature of its sounds, whether for harm or for the healing of his body or soul, so consider with me that the significance of the names in the divine Scriptures is more powerful than any incantation. For there are certain powers in us, of which the better are nourished by these as it were incantations, being akin to them; and even when we do not understand, those powers, which understand what is said, become stronger in us to help our life. That there are invisible things in us, and many of them, the psalm will show which says, “Bless the Lord, O my soul, and all that is within me, his holy name.” There is, then, a multitude of powers in us to which our souls and bodies have been allotted; and these, if they are holy, are benefited when Scripture is read and become stronger, even if our mind is unfruitful, as is written about one who speaks in a tongue: “For my spirit prays, but my mind is unfruitful.” Consider, then, that sometimes, when the mind in us is unfruitful, the powers that work together with the soul, the mind, and the whole of us are nourished by the rational food from the holy writings and these names, and being nourished become more powerful to help us. And just as the better powers are, as it were, enchanted and benefited and become stronger through such writings and names, so the powers in us that are opposed to them are, as it were, drawn down and overcome by God's incantations, and being overcome are put to sleep. And if any of us has ever seen an asp, or some other venomous creature, put to sleep by incantations, let him take that as an example for Scripture, when it is read and not understood and the hearer sometimes grows weary and loses heart; and let him believe that the asps and vipers within him become weaker through the charms of the charmers, such as wise Moses, wise Joshua, and the wise holy prophets. Let us not lose heart, then, when we hear Scriptures that we do not understand; but let it be done to us according to our faith, by which we also believe that “every Scripture, being God-breathed, is useful.” For you must accept one of two things about these Scriptures: either that they are not God-breathed, since they are not useful, as the unbeliever might suppose; or, as a believer, that since they are useful, they are God-breathed. One must know, however, that the benefit often comes to us without our perceiving it; for instance, we are often prescribed to eat some food
Chapter 915
915PG 12:915a–915d
ὀξυδερκικὴν, καὶ οὐδήπου ὲν τῷ ἐσθίειν αἰσθανόμεθα ὅτι ὠφελούμεθα τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν, ἀλλʼ ἡμέρας ὃιαγενομένης δευτέρας καὶ τρίτης, ὴ ἀνάδοσις τῆς τροφῆς τῆς ὠφελούσης τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν ποιεῖ ἡμᾶς τῇ πείρᾳ πιστεῦσαι ὅτι τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν ὠφελούμεθα. Ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπʼ ἄλλων τροφῶν ὠφελουσῶν τινα μέλη τοῦ σώματος ἔστι τοῦτο ἱδεῖψ οὕτω τοίνυν πίστευε καὶ περ). τῆς θείας Γραφῆς, ὅτι ὠφελεῖταί σου ἡ ψυχὴ, κᾶν μὴ ὁ νοῦς τὸν καρπὸν λαμβάνῃ τῆς ὠφελείας τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν γραμμάτων, ἐκ μόνης ψιλῆς τῆς ἀναγνώσεως. Τὰ γὰρ ὲν ἡμῖν ἐπᾴδεται, καὶ τὰ μὲν sepsit— τονα τρέφεται, τὰ δὲ χείρονα καταργεῖται.
oxyderkikēn, kai oudēpou en tǭ esthiein aisthanometha hoti ōpheloumetha ton ophthalmon, allʼ hēmeras hoiagenomenēs deuteras kai tritēs, ē anadosis tēs trophēs tēs ōphelousēs ton ophthalmon poiei hēmas tę̄ peirą pisteusai hoti ton ophthalmon ōpheloumetha. Alla kai epʼ allōn trophōn ōphelousōn tina melē tou sōmatos esti touto hideips houtō toinyn pisteue kai per). tēs theias Graphēs, hoti ōpheleitai sou hē psychē, kan mē ho nous ton karpon lambanę̄ tēs ōpheleias tēs apo tōn grammatōn, ek monēs psilēs tēs anagnōseōs. Ta gar en hēmin epądetai, kai ta men sepsit— tona trephetai, ta de cheirona katargeitai.
that sharpens the sight, and while eating we do not at all perceive that we are benefiting the eye; but when a second and a third day have passed, the distribution of the food that benefits the eye makes us believe by experience that the eye is being benefited. One can see this also with other foods that benefit certain members of the body. So, then, believe also concerning the divine Scripture that your soul is benefited, even if the mind does not receive the fruit of the benefit from the writings, from the bare reading alone. For the things within us are enchanted: the better are nourished, and the worse are abolished.
Chapter 943
943PG 12:943a–943d
Kal εὔξῖιτο Ἰεφθάε εὐχὴν τῷ Κυρίῳ. Εἰ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου ἐπʼ αὑτὸν, πῶς εὔχεται δι μὴ προσήκεις Ἐνῆν γὰρ καὶ κύνα ἀπαντῆσαι ἐπανιόντι τῷ Ἰεφθάε. 'Ap’ οὖν ἐσφάλη τὸ Πνεῦμα; οὐδαμῶς· ἀλλὰ τὸ μὲν Πνεῦμα βοηθεῖν παραγέγονεν, οὐχ ὑποβάλλειν τὴν ἄτοπον, εὐχήν· αὐτὸς δὲ σφάλλεται ἀπερισκέπτως ὑποσχόμενος. Καὶ εἶπαν αὺτῷ Ἐἰπὸν δὴ στάχυς. Ol δὲ ἔλεγον στάχυς· σημαίνει celi-qia, ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἄσταχυς. Οί δὲ ἔλεγον σεβήλω καὶ οὐκ ἐδύναντο τρανῶς εἰπεῖν adfinia. El γάρ καὶ Ἑβραῖοι ἐτύγχανον, ἀλλὰ κατὰ συμμετρίαν βραχύτητι παρήλλασσον ὲν τῇ τῆς διαλέξεως προφορᾷ. Τὸ οὖν σύνθεμα ἦν σέβηλα, ὅπερ οἱ ἐπερωτώμενοι λέγοντες σεβήλω, ἠλέγχοντο οὐκ ὄντες τῶν οίκείων τοῦ Ἰεφθάε, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἐπαναστάντων. Καὶ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ στεῖρα καὶ οὐκ ἔτεκεν. Ούκ ἀπὸ τῆς φύσεως, ἀλλʼ ἀπὸ τῆς διακονίας ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος στεῖραν καλεῖ. Σίδηρος οὐκ ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν μου ὅτι Ναᾷραῐος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγώ ειμι. Διʼ ὅλης τῆς περὶ τὸν Σαμψὼν ἱστορίας αἱ τρίχες φαίνονται τὴν πᾶσαν αὑτῷ περιποιεῖν ἰσχύν. Τοῦ αὑτοῦ. Ναζιραῖον τὸ πεῴυλαγμένον κατὰ τὴν Σύρων φωνὴν ὀνομάζει. Μὴ ὲξακολουθεῖν δὲ τῇ τάξει τῶν Ἰσραηλιτῶν τὸν Σαμψὼν ὁ Θεὸς προστάσσει, κατʼ ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν ξυρωμὲνων διὰ τὸ εὐσήμους εἶναι πρὸς πάντας. Καὶ ἐποίησεν Ἐφὼδ καὶ Θεραφείν. Ἑφὼδ ὕφασμα ἦν ἱερατικὸν, ὅπερ περικειμένῳ τῷ ἱερεῖ ἐφοίτα τοῦ ἁγίου Πνεύματοςή χάρις. Τὸ δὲ Θεραφεὶν τοιοῦτο μέντοι, ού θεῖκὸν δὲ, ἀλλʼ εἰδωλικὸν, ὼς ἐν ταῖς βασιλείαις δείκνυται. Καὶ ἐξῆλθον οί υἱοὶ Βενιαμίν. Τίνος ἕνεκεν ἡττῶνται δικαίως ἐπελθόντες Ἦ δῆλον ὅτι διὰ προλα- 6ούσης αἰτίας. Καὶ ό ψαλμός φησιν· ι Ὅταν λάβω καιρὸν, ἐγὼ εὐθύτητας κρινῶ. ι Εἶτα καὶ μετὰ τὸ ἡττηθῆναι, καὶ μίαν καὶ δευτέραν, μετῆλθεν ὀργὴ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἠδικηκότας, καὶ νικῶσι δίκαιαν νίκην.
Kal euxiito Iephthae euchēn tǭ Kyriǭ. Ei Pneuma Kyriou epʼ hauton, pōs euchetai di mē prosēkeis Enēn gar kai kyna apantēsai epanionti tǭ Iephthae. 'Ap’ oun esphalē to Pneuma? oudamōs; alla to men Pneuma boēthein paragegonen, ouch hypoballein tēn atopon, euchēn; autos de sphalletai aperiskeptōs hyposchomenos. Kai eipan autǭ Eipon dē stachys. Ol de elegon stachys; sēmainei celi-qia, hoper estin astachys. Oi de elegon sebēlō kai ouk edynanto tranōs eipein adfinia. El gar kai Hebraioi etynchanon, alla kata symmetrian brachytēti parēllasson en tę̄ tēs dialexeōs prophorą. To oun synthema ēn sebēla, hoper hoi eperōtōmenoi legontes sebēlō, ēlenchonto ouk ontes tōn oikeiōn tou Iephthae, alla tōn epanastantōn. Kai gynē autou steira kai ouk eteken. Ouk apo tēs physeōs, allʼ apo tēs diakonias epi tou parontos steiran kalei. Sidēros ouk anebē epi tēn kephalēn mou hoti Naąraios tou Theou egō eimi. Diʼ holēs tēs peri ton Sampsōn historias hai triches phainontai tēn pasan hautǭ peripoiein ischyn. Tou hautou. Naziraion to peǭylagmenon kata tēn Syrōn phōnēn onomazei. Mē exakolouthein de tę̄ taxei tōn Israēlitōn ton Sampsōn ho Theos prostassei, katʼ ekeino kairou tēn kephalēn xyrōmenōn dia to eusēmous einai pros pantas. Kai epoiēsen Ephōd kai Theraphein. Hephōd hyphasma ēn hieratikon, hoper perikeimenǭ tǭ hierei ephoita tou hagiou Pneumatosē charis. To de Theraphein toiouto mentoi, ou theikon de, allʼ eidōlikon, ōs en tais basileiais deiknytai. Kai exēlthon oi huioi Beniamin. Tinos heneken hēttōntai dikaiōs epelthontes Ē dēlon hoti dia prola- 6ousēs aitias. Kai o psalmos phēsin; i Hotan labō kairon, egō euthytētas krinō. i Eita kai meta to hēttēthēnai, kai mian kai deuteran, metēlthen orgē epi tous ēdikēkotas, kai nikōsi dikaian nikēn.
[Judg 11:30] “And Jephthah vowed a vow to the Lord.” If the Spirit of the Lord was upon him, how does he vow what is not fitting? For even a dog could have met Jephthah on his return. Did the Spirit, then, err? Not at all; the Spirit came to help, not to suggest the absurd vow; he himself erred, by promising thoughtlessly. [Judg 12:6] “And they said to him: Say ‘stachys.’” They said “stachys”: it signifies shibboleth, that is, “ear of grain.” “And they said ‘sebēlō’ and could not say it distinctly.” For even if they were Hebrews, they differed slightly in the pronunciation of their speech. The password, then, was “sebēla,” and those who, when questioned, said “sebēlō” were exposed as not belonging to Jephthah's people but to those who had risen against him. [Judg 13:2] “And his wife was barren and had not borne.” He calls her barren for the present not by nature but because of the divine dispensation. [Judg 16:17] “Iron has not come upon my head, for I am a Nazirite of God.” Throughout the whole story of Samson his hair appears to secure all his strength. [Of the same.] In the Syrian tongue he calls “Nazirite” what is guarded. God commands Samson not to follow the practice of the Israelites, who at that time shaved the head, so that he might be recognizable to all. [Judg 17:5] “And he made an ephod and teraphim.” The ephod was a priestly woven garment; when the priest wore it, the grace of the Holy Spirit came upon him. The teraphim was something of the same kind, yet not divine but idolatrous, as is shown in the Kingdoms. [Judg 20:21] “And the sons of Benjamin came out.” Why are those who attacked justly defeated? Clearly because of an earlier cause. And the psalm says, “When I take the appointed time, I will judge uprightly.” Then, after they had been defeated once and a second time, wrath came upon the wrongdoers, and they win a just victory.